241

Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural
Page 2: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board as a textbook for the class VIII from the academic year 1997

AGRICULTURAL EDUCATION [For class VIII]

Translated by

Mohammad Hossan Bhuyan Dr. Md. Abdul Hoque

Md. Aminul Islam Aluddin Bishwas

Edited by Dr. Md. Nazmul Huda

A.H.M. Monzurul Karim Md. Anwarul Hoque Beg

Liyakat Ali

National Curriculum and Textbook Board, Dhaka. Published by

Page 3: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

National Curriculum and Textbook Board, Dhaka 69–70, Motijheel Commercial Area, Dhaka-1000

[All rights reserved by the publisher]

First Print : 1997 Revised Edition : 2007 Reprint : May, 2009

Computer Compose Color Graphic

Cover Md. Abdul Halim

Design NCTB, Dhaka

For free distribution from academic year 2010 by the Government of Bangladesh

Printed By :

Page 4: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

PREFACE

Education is the key to development. A progressively improved education system largely determines the pace and the quality of national development. To reflect the hopes and aspirations of the people and the socio-economic and cultural reality in the context of the post independent Bangladesh, new textbooks were introduced in the beginning of the 1980s following the recommendations of the National Curriculum and Textbook Committee. In 1994, in accordance with the need for change and development, the textbooks of lower secondary, secondary and higher secondary were revised and modified. The textbooks from classes VI to IX were written in 1995. In 2000, almost all the textbooks were rationally evaluated and necessary revision were made. In 2008, the Ministry of Education formed a Task Force for Education. According to the advice and guidance of the Task Force, the cover, spelling and information in the textbooks were updated and corrected. To make assessment more meaningful and in accordance with the need of the curriculum, Creative Questions and Multiple Choice Questions are given at the end of each chapter. It is hoped that this will reduce the dependency of students on rote memorisation. The students will be able to apply the knowledge they have gained to judge, analyse and evaluate real life situation. The economy and development of Bangladesh is dependent on agriculture. The study of Agriculture Science is the main instrument to acquire the necessary skills for development of agriculture. In the lower secondary classes learners need to know about the technology that can be applied in the field of agriculture. They also need to learn both theoretical and practical aspects. Keeping this in mind Agriculture Science, gardening, crops & planting, forestation, pisciculture, livestock management, etc. have been included in the syllabus. Importance has also been given to develop self-employment and social values through practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural Science for class VIII is the English Version of the original textbook entitled ‘Krishi Shiksha’ written in Bangla. We know that curriculum development is a continuous process on which textbooks are written. Any logical and formative suggestions for improvement will be considered with care. On the event of the golden jubilee of the Independence of Bangladesh in 2021, we want to be a part of the ceaseless effort to build a prosperous Bangladesh. In spite of sincere efforts in translation, editing and printing some inadvertent errors and omissions may be found in the book. However, our efforts to make it more refined and impeccable will continue. Any constructive suggestion towards its further improvement will be gratefully considered. I thank those who have assisted us with their intellect and efforts in the writing, editing and rational evaluation of this book. We hope that the book will be useful for the students for whom it is written. Prof. Md. Mostafa Kamaluddin Chairman National Curriculum and Textbook Board Dhaka.

Page 5: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

CONTENTS

Chapter Subject Page Chapter One CULTIVATION OF HORTICULTURAL CROPS Section- 1 Horticultural crops 01 Section- 2 Seed 08 Section- 3 Vegetative propagation of plants. 15 Section- 4 Cultivation of Fruits 25 Section- 5 Cultivation of vegetables 45 Section- 6 Cultivation of flowers 61 Chapter Two Section- 1 Rearing of improved Variety of Cows 79 Section- 2 Fattening of Cattle 93 Section- 3 Rearing of Goats 99 Section- 4 Rearing of Sheep 105 Section- 5 Slaughtering of animals and collection of by – products 111 Chapter- Three DOMESTIC POULTRY HUSBANDRY Section- 1 Methods of poultry rearing 115 Section- 2 Poultry farming in homestead 121 Section- 3 Production and prevention of eggs. 131 Section- 4 Infectious disease of poultry birds 141 Section- 5 Rearing of qoel 150 Chapter- Four PISCICULTURE Section- 1 Resource of Bangladesh 156 Section- 2 Different methods of fish culture 170 Section- 3 Mixed culture of carp variety 185 Section- 4 Disease of fish and its remedies 199 Chapter- Five FORESTRY Section- 1 Importance of trees 209 Section- 2 Cultivation of bamboo, Cane and mutha. 217 Section- 3 Introduction of medicinal plants and its uses 223 Section- 4 Plantation on the roads and embankments 229 Section- 5 Agro forestry. 235

Chapter One

Page 6: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Horticultural Crops Section-1

Horticultural Crops

Horticultural Crops : Horticultural Crops are the crops like flowers, fruits, vegetables and spices. Horticultural Crops are usually cultivated on high land around homestead. How ever, horticultural Crops are also cultivated in the field on commercial basis. Horticulture is an important branch of agricultural science. Horticultural Crops may be classified into four groups These are : 1. Fruits : Example of such crops- Mango, Litchi, etc. 2. Vegetables : Example of such crops- battle gourd, country bean, etc. 3. Flowers : Example of such crops- Rose, Tube rose. 4. Spices : Example of such crops- Onion, garlic, etc. Importance of Horticultural Crops : The importance of Horticultural Crops is much. Its importance is discussed in two categories, such as economic importance and its importance as food. Economic Importance : Cultivation of Horticultural Crops is very profitable. The main economic advantage of these crops is that more profit can be achieved from a small area of land. The following points will help you to understand the importance of Horticultural Crops. A. Meeting Family Need : The need for fruits and vegetables can easily be fulfilled by cultivating these in the lands around the homestead. Sometimes the excess crops may be sold. In this way money which would have been spent for buying fruits and vegetables from the market may be saved and these could be some extra income too. Agriculture Education, For Class-VIII, Forma-1

Page 7: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

2 Agriculural Education B. Business : People having sufficient land can cultivate horticultural crops commercially and thus earn much profit. For example, one can gain 1.5 times more profit be cultivating banana than rice. Not only banana, but also each and every horticultural crops brings more profit. C. Fulfilling Timber Need : Valuable wood may be obtained from fruit trees like Mango, Black Berry and Jackfruit. Necessary furniture for a family can be made of this wood or these could be sold in the market for additional income. D. Fulfilling Fuel Need : Sufficient fuel material can be obtained from branches of trees like Mango, Black Berry, Jackfruit, Guava, Plum, etc. This fuel can be used for domestic purpose or can be sold to earn money. E. Self Employment : Self employment is possible by cultivating and selling fruits, flowers and vegetables. There are many Horticultural Crops that can be cultivated with very little manual labour. Young man and women can cultivate these crops and sell these products and thus can become self employed. The short term seasonal vegetables, fruits and flowers can be cultivated and sold several times in a year. F. Progressing of Fruits and Vegetable : Money can be earned by processing Mango, Jackfruit, Pineapple, Tomato, Potato, , Fruits and vegetables. For example- Mango pickle, dried slices of mango, Pineapple jelly, Tomato sauce, Potato chips can be prepared. G. Flower Business: The demand of flowers in this country is gradually increasing. Importance as Food : In Bangladesh food deficit and malnutrition is a common feature. Fruits and vegetables can fulfill the demand of food and nutrition in the country. On average about 275 grams of vegetables and 115 grams of fruits are required for an adult per day. Consumption of fruits and vegetables reduces pressure on rice and also supplies nutrition. Fruit and vegetables are common sources of carbohydrate, protein, fat, vegetables and minerals (Table-1). The importance of fruits and vegetables as source of food elements are discussed in table.

Page 8: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Horticultural Crops 3

Table –1 Nutrient Compounds and Elements available in different fruits,

vegetables and spices (In 100 gram edible portion)

Name of the crop

protein (gram)

Carbo- hydrate (Gram)

fat and oil (gram)

Vitamins Mineral nutrient elements (gram)

A Micro (gm)

B-1 mg

B-2 (mg)

C (mg)

Mango 1.0 20.0 0.7 8300 0.10 0.07 41 0.4 Pineapple 0.9 6.2 0.2 1830 0.11 0.04 21 0.2 Banana 0.7 25.0 0.8 0 0.10 0.05 24 0.9 Jack Fruit 1.8 9.9 0.10 4700 0.11 0.15 21 1.1 plum 2.9 23.8 0.1 0 0.02 0.05 51 1.0 Guava 0.9 11.2 0.3 100 0.21 0.09 210 0.7 Litchi 1.1 13.6 0.2 0 0.02 0.06 31 0.5 Papaya 1.9 8.3 0.2 8100 0.08 0.03 57 0.7 Brinjal 1.8 2.2 2.9 850 0.12 0.08 5 0.8 Potato 1.6 22.6 0.6 0 0.03 0.03 10 0.6 Tomato 0.9 3.6 0.1 192 0.07 0.01 31 0.6 Sweet gourd

1.4 4.5 0.5 7200 0.07 0.06 26 0.7

country bean

3.9 5.4 0.1 2540 0.06 0.01 2 0.7

Cauliflower

2.6 7.5 0.1 0 0.027 0.03 91 0.8

Cabbage 1.3 4.7 0.2 0 0.06 0.05 3 0.5 Red amaranth

5.3 5.0 0.1 11940 0.10 0.13 43 1.6

Spinach 3.3 4.0 0.1 8470 0.03 0.09 97 1.8 Indian Spinach

2.2 4.2 0.2 12750 0.02 0.36 64 1.4

Chilli 15.9 31.6 6.2 345 0.93 .043 50 6.1 Onion 1.2 11.2 0.1 0 0.08 0.01 11 0.6 Garlic 6.3 29.8 0.1 0 0.06 0.23 13 1.0 Turmeric 6.3 69.4 5.1 30 0.03 0 0 3.5

Source : Country’s Standard of Food and Nutrition in local Food, Food and Nutrition Institute; Dhaka University

Page 9: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

4 Agricultural Education

Carbohydrate: Carbohydrate supplies heat and energy to the body. Almost all fruits and vegetables contain carbohydrate. Mango, banana, jackfruit, plum, guava, litchi, chili, potato, spined gourd turmeric, garlic etc. contain sufficient quantities of Carbohydrate.

Protein : The basic structure of each cell of our body is made of protein molecule. Fruits and vegetables like banana, jackfruit, plum, brinjal, potato, red amaranth, spinach, chili, turmeric, coriander etc. contain sufficient quantities of protein.

Fats and Oils : Like carbohydrate, fat supplies heat and energy to our body. Most of the types of horticultural crops contain more or less some portion of fat and oil.

Vitamins : Fruits, vegetables and spices contain large quantities of Vitamin A, Vitamin B and Vitamin C. Physiological disorder in a body happens due to vitamin. The fruits and vegetables, namely mango, pineapple, dificiencey jack fruits, papaya, guava, plum black berry, sweet gourd, red amaranth, Indian spinach, cabbage, cauliflower, tomato, chili, etc. contain sufficient quantity of vitamins.

Mineral : Mineral salts are very important for normal growth and development of the body. Some mineral salts are specifically required for certain organs of the body. The important elements of mineral nutrition are calcium, iron, manganese, copper, sulpher, chlorine and iodin. Fruits and vegetables contain sufficient quantities of mineral salts.

Garden Planning: The planning of a garden includes the preparatory activities for the production of vegetables, fruits, spices and flowers by making proper use of land around homestead or school premises. In a garden plan, almost all the horticultural crops should be scientifically and attractively arranged in an appropriate design. Such a well planned landscape garden increases the beauty of a homestead or a school like a picture.

Usually smaller plots are available around a homestead or a premise. The gardens are supposed to be made on those small plots. The major points to be considered in planning a garden are given below.

1. Various species of vegetables; fruits and spices are to be planted in the garden.

2. Specific sites should be selected for planting vegetables, fruits, flowers and spices.

Page 10: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Horticultural Crops 5 3. A landscape design should be laid out listing the horticultural crops according to the

season when these will be grown. 4. Horticultural crops should be planted according to the present landscape design. 5. All the seedlings (vegetable seedlings) should not be planted at a time. Instead these

should be grown in crop rotation system. For example, if a family- needs a total 100 pieces of cauliflower, it should be planted in four batches.

6. Arrangement should be made for proper irrigation and drainage system in the garden. Considering the points mentioned above, the process of establishing horticultural garden around the homestead and attached plots are discussed below. 1. Hedge of croton or henna may be ground by planting them in multiple runs around the

homestead. Few date, palm or sujina plants may be also grown between the croton hedge lines. Flowering plants like Shefali, Rangan,Hasnahena, Gandharaj etc. Plants may be grown at the four corners of the hedge and these may serve the purpose of hedge and also fulfill the family need for flowers.

2. Several vegetables can be grown by crop rotation making beds in the inner side of the hedge boundary.

3. Big trees such as mango, jack-fruits, coconut, olive, etc, should be planted at the north west sides of the homestead.

4. The short term fruit producing plants, such as banana, papaya, citrus, pine pineapple, plum, guava, etc. should be planted in the north eastern and south western parts of the homestead.

5. Plants, such as bayleaf, cinamon, pomegranate etc. may be planted at the front side for the landscape of increasing the beauty of the homestead.

6. Plants like custard apple, betelnut, dwarf banana varieties, bayleaf may be grown at the shady places of the homestead.

7. White gourd, sweet gourd, country bean, bottle gourd, ribbed gourd, etc. may be grown according to season by putting up permanent frames at the side of the homestead.

8. Yams, country bean, ribbed gourd, black peppers, etc. may be grown allowing them to climb the common trees of the homestead wherever possible.

9. Ginger, turmeric, pani kachu, man kachu, etc. may be planted at the shady places of the homestead.

10. Papaya, pomegranate, and green chilli may be grown at the corners of the yard.

Page 11: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

6 Agricultural Education

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ) 1. Which one of the following is horticulture crop?

a. Vegetables b. Paddy

c. Wheat d. Tick

2. The source of vitamin is-

i. Coriander, jack fruit, turmeric, spined gourd.

ii. Sweet gourd, papaya, guava, red amaranth.

iii. Cabbage, tomato, chili, pineapple.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. ii & iii

c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question no. 3, 4 and 5. Nutrient compounds and elements available in different fruits, vegetables and spices (in100 gram edible portion)

Name of Crops Protein (gm) Carbohydrates (gm) fat & oil (gm)

Guava 0.9 11.2

Spinach 3.3 4.0

Garlic 6.3 29.8

Sweet gourd 1.4 4.5

Potato 1.6 22.6

Chili 15.9 31.6

3. As per the above list which one contains more compounds and elements that constitute the basic structure of body cell?

a. Potato b. Mango

c. Spinach d. Garlic

Page 12: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Horticultural Crops 7

4. How much protein will be available from a guava of 300 gm.

a. 2.3 gm b. 2.5 gm

c. 2.7 gm d. 2.9 gm

5. As per contents exhibited in the table sufficient quantity of carbohydrates are available in:

i. Spinach, sweet gourd and guava

ii. Sweet gourd, potato and garlic

iii. Potato, garlic and guava

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. ii

c. iii d. i, ii & iii

Creative Questions (CQ) Tito decided to make a horticulture garden by forming a hedge around. 5 decimal fallow lands located at the south east corner of his homestead. His neighbour advised him to plant some fruit trees on the ridge of the garden so that the fruits and vegetables produced in that garden can meet the demand of nutrition of the family. Besides that he has one decimal follow land at the north of his homestead.

a. What kind of crops are vegetables?

b. Explain the importance of planting fruit trees on the ridge of the land.

c. Explain what can be planted in the land located at the north of Tito’s home-stead to bring good result.

d. Design a plan to fulfill the demand of vegetables for the whole year from that 5 decimal land of south east corner.

Page 13: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

SECTION 2 SEED

Definition of Seed According to the botanist, the matured and fertilized ovule of the flower of a plant may be termed as a seed. For example, the grains of rice, wheat, mustard, seeds of mango, jack fruits , litchi, etc. are the botanical seeds. These seeds are also known as true seeds. On the other hand, according to agricultural scientists, any plant or part of a plant which can produce a new plant of its own type when placed in a suitable medium is known as seed. The sugar cane cuttings, potato, sweet potato, root of spined gourd, grafts of mango leaves of Pathrkuchi are the examples of this type of seed.

Importance of Seed

The importance of seed in crop production is much. No crop production is possible without seed. Because new plants are grown from seeds. Fruits, grains are produced from plants which are being up by human, animals and birds as food consumed for their life process. The prime importance of seed is that having all the required inputs available at hand, no agricultural crop production is possible without seeds.

Good crop is only produced from a good quality seed. It is essential to use quality seed for getting sufficient and improved quality crops. If the seed is not of high quality, the application of fertilizers, water irrigation, insect pest and disease control measures can not ensure expected higher production of a crop. In many cases the result is wastage of money.

Qualities of Seed :There may be a wide range of quality in seeds.

A Seed has variety of qualities. The quality of a seed is determined through different tests. The qualities of seeds are discussed below.

Purity in the variety of seed :

The purity in the variety of seed means its genetic purity. Every crop and its variety has certain characteristics on which its production depends. The variety of purity of a seed is spoiled when other variety seeds get mixed with a specific variety. The purity of variety of a seed may be maintained if it is grown under controlled condition.

Page 14: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Seed 9

Purity of seed : A pure seed is one which is clean and free from dust, seeds of weeds or other crops. So a clean pure seed will not contain weed seeds, other variety seeds, any waste materials, and non living materials. The purity of a seed may be increased by sieving and winowing. Purity of seed at a satisfactory level may also be obtained by using mechanical devices. The sample seeds from a seed lot are divided into three categories. These categories are pure seeds, seeds of other crops and non-living materials. The purity of the seeds is measured in per cent on the basis of the weight of the sample.

Germination capacity : The germination capacity of a seed is judged by the member of young plants produced out of a hundred. A good seed may have a germination capacity of hundred per cent. But seeds do not usually germinate at such a rate. If a seed sample has a germination capacity of 70-80 per cent, it is considered a good quality seed. The germination capacity of a seed is dependent on the moisture content and dormancy stage of the seeds.

Moisture content of seeds : The moisture content of a seed is very much important for keeping it vigorous. The per cent of water content of a seed is considered to be the moisture content of a seed. As the moisture content of a seed increases, its germination capacity and vitality decreases. If the seed is too dry on the other hand, the germ of the seed will become dry. The seeds of rice or wheat may be preserved for up to a year if its moisture content is less than 12 per cent. But if the moisture content is more, the germination capacity is rapidly lost. It is needed to sow the seeds with normal moisture contents at the sowing time.

Seed health : A healthy seed is one that is free from diseases and insects. A seed may carry pathogenic micro-organisms like fungi, bacteria and virus. Again, a seed may be infested with insect when these are stored in godowns. The pathogenic germs may live on the seed coat or within the seed. There is no surety that a disease and insect infested seed will produce a health seedling. A seedling from a disease or insect infested seed may be rotten before its germination.

Vigour of seed : When a seedling of a seed becomes vigorous and healthy and can grow well under unfavorable conditions, the seed is called a vigorous seed. A seedling or a plant has to face different unfavorable conditions starting from sowing of seed to harvesting of the crops. A seed can withstand more unfavorable condition if it has more vitality. The vigour of a seed may be determined by measuring the rapidity of seed germination or the length of the seedling.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-2

Page 15: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

10 Agricultural Education

Dormancy of Seed: Almost every seed of crops has a definite dormancy period. during which a seed though placed under favorable condition do not germinated is known as dormancy period of the seed. A seed does not always germinate when it is sown in the field. A certain period of time is necessary for the germination of a seed or it is needed to break the dormancy of the seed through special means. Characteristics of a Seed : The quality which gives a separate identity to a seed may be considered as its characteristics. The seed protects the security of the germ : The presence of intact germ in a seed acts as the symbol of vitality of the seed. When the germ of a seed is dead, that seed is also considered as dead. New plants grow from the living germs. The seed coat protects the germ from excess heat, extreme cold and other unfavorable conditions. Seed is the storehouse of new seedling : The new nutrient elements required for a new seedling are present in the seed. The seedling at first utilizes that nutrients after germination of the seed and then it takes up its nutrient elements from within the soil. With the help of its roots. Seed is the medium of propagation of Plants : Propagation of plants is mainly done by seed. A plant cannot move from one place to another. But seeds of plants are dispersed by human being, animals, air and water from one country to another and thus continues propagation. Seed is the major medium of improvement of plant variety : Every crop has different varieties. Some varieties produce low, while some other varieties of the same crop produce high crops. It is needed to improve the low producing varieties for increasing the production of agriculture. Only seeds are used for developing a new variety of plants. Many new varieties are developed by bringing necessary changes in the genetic make up of the existing crop speices. Seed is the food of animals: Ninety per cent of the total cultivated seeds in the world are cereals, namely rice, wheat, maize, etc. These cereal seeds are the major food of human being. The pulses, oil seeds, etc. are our essential major food crops. Animals and birds take these cereal seeds or its wastes as food. Seed is the source of beautification : This wonderful world is full of variety plants. Different plant have different types of seeds. The seeds are different in size , shape, colour and flavour. Some seeds are flat, some are round, some are very tiny some are yellow and some are reddish. The flavour of some seeds is attractive while some have bad flavour. The different in seed colour of seeds is a source of beauty.

Page 16: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Seed 11

PRACTICAL

Name of the Experiment : Determinating the purity of seed.

Materials

1. Forcep-1

2. Magnifying lense-1

3. White paper-1 sheet

4. Weighing balance-1

5. Seeds of a specific crops or a variety.

Quantity of Seeds

If the size of the seed is small, the sample size may be 4 to 5 grams. If the size of the seed is medium the sample size may be 40 grams. If the size of the seed is large, for example wheat, the size of sample may be 120 grams.

Number of Seeds

To conduct this experiment or determine the purity of seeds, the number of seeds in the sample should be at least – 2,500.

Process

1. Take a sample of 120 grams of paddy seeds by using a balance to weigh.

2. Spread the seeds on a sheet of white paper.

3. Separate the seeds according to the following categories ( use magnifying lense in separating the seeds)

a. Pure seeds.

b. Seeds of other crops and weed seeds.

c. non-living materials.

4. Take the weights of each of the seeds separately.

5. After weighing, calculate the per cent of each portion of seed sample.

6. Write down your observations at each step in the practical note book and it to your the class teacher.

Page 17: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

12 Agricultural Education

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. What percentage of germination capacity of the seed is called a good seed?

a. 50-60 b. 60-70

c. 70-80 d. 80-90

2. The moisture content of seed helps in-

i. Keeping the seed vigorous.

ii. Maintaining the purity of seeds intact.

iii. Storing correct ingredients of food.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii d. ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 3 and 4.

Subir preserved seeds of wheat with 15% moisture content for a period of 211 year and

sowed in the field. He found that a small percentage of seeds were germinated.

3. The cause of small percentage of germination is that

a. The moisture content was more.

b. The seed was in dormancy period.

c. The seed was preserved for more than the normal period.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii

Page 18: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Seed 13

4. What precaution should Subir take before sowing the seeds? a. Examine the varietal purity. b. Examine the moisture content of seeds. c. Examine the health of seeds. d. Examine the germination capacity of seeds.

Creative Questions (CQ)

1. Every year Mr. Alam cultivates seeds of rice collecting from agriculture office and gets a good harvest. This year being unable to collect seed from agriculture office he collected seeds from his neighbor who was a farmer and planted in the land. After some months of plantation he finds three types of tall, medium and short sized scattered rice plants in the same plot of land. He became somewhat worried.

a. What is a seed? b. For getting sufficient production why it is essential to use quality seeds? c. Explain the cause of germination of three types of seeds in the same plot of Mr.

Alam.

d. Analyze the cause of Mr. Alam’s anxiety.

Page 19: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

SECTION 3

Vegetative Propagation Of Plants

Method of Vegetative Propagation The process by which new plants are produced from branches, roots, nodes, buds, etc. instead of a true seed is called vegetative propagation. The vegetative propagations of plants are of two types. These are:

1. Natural vegetative propagation method

2. Artificial vegetative propagation method

Natural Vegetative Propagation Method The process by which seedling are normally produced from rhizome, stem roots, etc.known as natural vegetative propagation method. Some natural methods of vegetative propagation of plants are described below.

1. Modified Stem Scales or bulb : The stems of onion and garlic are known as scale tuber or bulb. Onion and garlic plant propagate with their bulbs.

Corm : The stems of kachu or aroid plants are known as corm. The mukhi kachu plant propagate with its corm.

Rhizome : The stems of ginger and turmeric, etc. are known as rhizome. The propagation of ginger and turmeric is done by rhizome.

Tuber : The underground stem of potato in known as tuber. Potato propagates through tuber.

2. Modified Root : Tuberous Root of sweet potato is an example of modified root. Sweet potato is cultivated with its tuberous root.

Page 20: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Vegetative Propagation of plants 15

3. Ground Plantlets

The new plantlets grown at the base of the mother plant, below or above the soil are known as ground plantlets. Suckers, obsut and ratoons are the examples of ground plantlets.

Suckers : The plantlets grown at the base of banana and pineapple are known as suckers. Banana and pineapple crop plants are propagated with their suckers.

Obsuts : The runners are developed from the base of aroid plants and water hyacinth. The front part of such runners gradually grows fully and converts to new plants. These are known as obsuts.

Ratoons : The underground plantlets developed from the base of banana and sugar etc. crops plants after the harvest of the crop are known as retoons. The crops obtained from ratoon are known as ratoon crops or muse crops.

4. Leaves :

The patharkuchi plant propagates through its leaves.

5. Stems :

For propagations of sugarcane, croton, mehdi, cactus plants stems are used directly.

6. Roots :

The propagation of citrus lemon, pomegranate, guava, etc. may be done through root cuttings.

Natural Vegetative Propagation

Root Stem Leaf Ground Plantlet

Modified root

Modified Stem

Sucker Obsut Ratoon

Root tuber

Scale bulb corm

Rhizome Tuber

Page 21: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

16 Agricultural Education

Artificial Vegetative Propagation Method The process by which new plants are produced from branches, roosts, buds or eyes taking these separately from the mother plants or grafting these on other plants is known as artificial vegetative propagation method or grafting. Usually, fruits and landscape beautifying plants are artificially propagated. The different methods of artificial vegetative propagation are given below.

1. Cutting 2. Simple layering 3. Grafting 4. Budding

Simple Layering When a one year old branch is selected and propagation is done, it is called simple layering process. In this process, some nodes measuring 3-4 cm. is debarked near the soil and placed under earth for producing roots. When roots are grown, the branch is separated from the mother plant like guti kalam, lemon, rangan, etc. are the examples of simple layering.

Artificial Vegetative Propagation Methods

Budding Grafting Simple layering

Cutting

Contact grafting

Detached grafting

T Building Patch Building

vinner grafting

Page 22: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Vegetative Propagation of plants 17

Grafting :

The vegetative propagation done by joining a branch of a plant to the stem of another plant of good species is called grafting. The plant on which the grafting is

done is known as stock. The improved branch selected for grafting is known as scion.

Grafting may be of two types, such as:

1. Contact grafting and

2. Detached grafting.

Contact grafting

About 20-30- cm above the ground level, a cut on a one year old land plant is made. The size of the cut should be 4-6 cm long and the depth would be one third of the girdth of the plant. A similar cut is also made on the selected scion plant of same size and same dimension. Then the stock and the scion plant part should be tied together at the cut points and the tub having the scion plant will have to be hung. Within a period of about three months, the stock and scion will get joined Then just below the joining the branch of the mother plant will have to be separated gradually in 2-3 times cutting the shoot of the graft. This type of graft gets ready for planting in the land after about four weeks. he separated graft should be kept in a shady place for few days before it is kept in the nursery.

Detached Grafting

When a scion portion of a plant is joined to the seedling stock plant after cutting its (stock plant) shoot and the graft is done it is known as detached grafting. The detached grafting are of seven types. These are :

1. Vineer grafting.

2. Eye budding.

3. Apex grafting

4. Tongue grafting

5. Cleft grafting

6. Side rafting

7. Aroho grafting

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-3

Page 23: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

18 Agricultural Education

Practical

1. Title of the Experiment : Simple Layering

Materials

1. One citrus lemon plant

2. A sharp knife and some soil mixed

with rotten cowdung.

3. One part of cowdung and three parts of clay soil.

Process 1. Select a strong, disease free branch of a one year old lemon plant near the soil surface. 2. Give a round cut for debarking four centimeter area of the selected branch below base

nodes. 3. Put the mixed soil on the cut point. 4. Then insert the cut portion of the branch in the mixture of cowdung and soil and hold

the branch with the help of ‘Λ’ shaped stick or put one brick over it.

Within a period of about two months, roots will start growing from the surface of the cut portion of the soil- covered branch.

Fig : 1 Simple layering

Grafting

Apex grafting

Contact grafting

Vineer grafting

Eye budding

Detached grafting

Aroho grafting

Tong Tue grafting

Cleft Side grafting

Page 24: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Vegetative Propagation of plants 19

5. Cut the branch from the mother plant below the roots with a sharp knife. 6. Then plant this layer to your selected place. 7. Note the working procedure in your practical note book and record the following

information. a. Date of performing the layering. b. Date of first root initiation. c. Date of detaching the layer from the mother plant. d. Date of planting the layer.

2. Title of the Experiment : Preparing Grafts ( Contact Grafting) Materials

1. A one year old mango seedling stock plant grown in a tub 2. One mother plant as scion 3. One sharp grafting knife 4. Polyethylene tape

Work Process 1. Collect one mango seedling plant of one year old grown

in a tub. This plant will serve the purpose of the stock plant in the experiment.

2. Debark four cm. area of the stock plant keeping 25

centimeter above the ground level of the seedling. The cut should be done to a depth of one third of the base girdth of the stock plant having a little soft wood.

3. Select a branch from the mother plant as a scion of the

same age and size. 4. Debark the base of the scion to a depth of one third of

the girdth similarly.

5. Then tie the stock and scion plant together with a polyethylene tape very tightly without creating any vacuum.

Fig : 3 Contact grafting

Fig. 2 : Stock

Page 25: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

20 Agricultural Education 6. Hang the tub binding it with a branch of a tree. 7. You will see that the stock and the scion will be joined together in a period of three

months. 8. Separate the branch of the mother plant gradually by cutting in three steps. 9. Keep the separated joined graft in a shady place for few days. 10. Then cut the shoot of the seedling and keep it in a nursery. 11. Plant this graft in a selected site or pit after about four months.

3. Title of the Experiment: Eye Budding in Rose plant

(‘T’ eye budding).

Materials

1. One stock plant of wild rose

2. Scion or mother plant of an improved rose variety.

3. A sharp knife for grafting.

4. One big scissor.

5. Polyethylene tape. Work Process 1. Collect a stock plant of wild rose. 2. Collect a bud of two cm long and one cm wide with some soft from the improved rose

variety mother plant with the sharp knife and keep in water instantly.

Fig : 4

Branch of the mother plant with

the bud

Removing bark of the same

measurement for setting the bud in

the stock plant

Setting bud in the Stock plant

Binding the bud after setting in

the stock plant

Cutting the unimproved

branch after the

emergence of the new

improved bud

2 c.

m

Page 26: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Vegetative Propagation of plants 21

The process of ‘T’ eye grafting.

3. Remove the wood portion of the collected bud keeping the bud intact. 4. Now select one elongated node 15 cm above the ground level of the stock plant. 5. Prune some of the leaves, branches, twigs and spines of the stock plant by a scissor. 6. Now cut a portion of about one cm of the bark in a crosswise manner with the knife. 7. Then give another lengthwise cut from the mid place of the first cut to downwards of

about three cm. 8. Then slowly insert the handle of the knife through the length wise cut and separate the

bark from the wood so that there does not occur any crack in the, rather a gap is created between the bark and the wood.

9. Set the bud along with the bark of the mother plant in the gap created within the bark and wood of the stock plant.

10. Now keeping the mouth of the bud open bind it with the stock plant tightly with polyethylene tape.

11. New leaves and twigs will come out within 2-3 weeks after the completion the budding and the joining of the scion and the stock.

4. Title of the Experiment : Patch Eye Budding in Jujubi plum Tree Materials .

1. A scion from and improved variety of jujibi plum tree. 2. A local unimproved plum tree (stock) 3. A sharp knife for grafting 4. Polythylene tape.

Process

1. Select one unimproved jujubi tree (stock tree.)

2. Select another improved jujubi tree ( scion) 3. Cut all the branches of the improved jujubi tree keeping about two meters above the

ground level.

Page 27: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

22 Agricultural Education

1. New shoots and bud will come out after 3-4 weeks of the pruning of the tree.

2. Wait until the new growth attains a size of 30 cm long.

3. Then cut the bark of the stock plant with a size of two cm long and one cm wide with the sharp knife.

4. Collect a newly grown bud along with bark from the improved scion plant of the same size.

5. Bind the new improved scion bud keeping its mouth open with the debarked place of the stock plant tightly with the polyethylene tape so that on gap remains within the joint.

6. The newly grafted bud will start growing after about 8-10 days of grafting. Then cut the shoot of the stock plant 2-3 cm above the joint.

7. Exercise this patch eye budding with several jujubi tree.

The branch with bud the mother

plant

Cutting the bark of the stock

plant in ‘T’ shape

Setting the bud in

the place which has been cut in ‘T’ patch shape

Binding of the bud in the stock plant

Cutting the unimproved part

of the stock plant growth of

the bud.

Fig : 5 Patch eye budding system

2 c.

m

Page 28: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Vegetative Propagation of plants 23

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ) 1. How many types of grafting are there?

a. 2 b. 3

c. 4 d. 5

2. Simple layering process is done in

i. Guava, Mango and Litchi trees.

ii. Rangan, Guava and Lemon trees.

iii. Lemon, Rose and Plum trees.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. ii

c. i & ii d. ii & iii

See the above figure and answer question nos. 3 & 4.

3. In figure-2 production of plants requires-

i. Ratoon

ii. Scion

iii. Stock

Figure-1 Figure-2

Page 29: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

24 Agricultural Education Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. i & iii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

4. In figure 1 & 2 what is the main similarity?

a. Natural propagation of plants.

b. Lower death rate of baby plants.

c. Real propagation of plants without seed.

d. The two figures are surely of fruit trees.

Creative Questions (CQ)

Figure-1 Figure-2

As a practical lesson the steps of detached grafting prepared personally by the agriculture

teacher Mr. Jamal is shown in the above figure. This type of grafting devised by Mr. Jamal

bears how much importance in case of our country.

a. What is the method of vegetative propagation?

b. What is meant by the figure-2?

c. Draw a figure of vineer grafting using Fig-1 and Fig-2 and discuss.

d. Explain why Mr. Jamal gave more importance to detached grafting than to

normal grafting.

Page 30: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 4

Cultivation Of Fruits Mango

About 40-45 types of mango are cultivated in Bangladesh. The long term fruits include mango, jack fruit, litchi, jujubi, lemon, coconut, wood apple, black berry, etc. The important short term fruits are papaya, banana, pine apple, water melon, etc. Most of the fruit growing areas and the total production of fruits in Bangladesh are getting increased. For this it is very important to cultivate fruits with more care and in scientific cultivation methods.

Mango is the principal fruit of Bangladesh. Mango trees have been growing in the country for about 4000 years. Mango is called the `King of Fruits` due to its incomparable taste, flavor and nutrient contents. The importance of mango in Bangladesh is very high for varied reasons. In many areas it is an important cash crop. It has diversified use .Mango may be eaten in both green and ripe condition. The taste of green mango is sour acidic. The green mango may be processed for producing various tasty food items like pickle ,dried slices of green mango, thin dried layers made of ripe mango pulp, and chutney etc other food stuff like . Squash, nectar, jam, jelly etc. may also be produced from ripe mango. The yield of mangos ranged from 7-8 tons per hectare in the mid-seventies, but this production rate has come up to about forty tons per hectare in recent years. On the other hand, the demand for mango is increasing day by day. To meet up these demands, mango should be cultivated in scientific method.

Improved Varieties of Mango

There are many varieties of mango outside in Bangladesh. Many people think that the total number of varieties may be more than two hundred. However, all varieties are not equally good. Some varieties are of high yielding, Some are found to be of excellent taste while some others may have sour taste Mango is found to grow very well in the northern districts of Bangladesh. The names of some varieties of mangoes are mentioned below:

Agricultural Education, For Class-VIII, Forma-4

Page 31: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

26 Agricultural Education

Early varieties : Khirshapati, Gopalbhog, Dudhia, Kishanbhog and Mohananda

Mid season varieties : Langra, Mohanbhog, Bombay and Himsagar Baric-2

Late varieties : Fazli and Aswina.

Year round varieties : These produce fruits all round the year but are inferior to Langra, Gopalbhog, etc. in taste and flavour.

Langra

Langra is the most popular variety of mango in Bangladesh. The Langra variety is very sweet with slight acidic sweet taste. It is very juicy, fibreless and has a very attractive flavour. The skin of Langra variety is thin and the seed is small. The weight of each mango may be 250-300 grams. The shape of the mango is like the shape of an egg. The colour of the ripened mango is slightly yellowish. Langra is a mid season variety of mango. Ripe Langra mango is available from late Jaishtha to late Ashar.

Every tree bears large number of fruits. Specially the plants over 15 years of age produce large number of fruits. The Langra variety of mango is mostly an alternate bearer. The seeds of Langra do not produce good seedling or plant. So this variety of mango should be propagated by planting grafts.

Fazli

Among all other variety of mango, the Fazli is the largest in size. Its is from Maldah district of India. The Fazli variety of mango is found to grow in large quantity in the district of Chanpai Nawabgong in Bangladesh. It is a late variety. Fruits are found to be matured and ripened in the months of Sraban and Bhadra. The size of the mango is slightly elongated and large enough. The weight of each of mango may very between 600- 1100 grams.

The skin of the mango is very thin and the seed is very small and flat. The fruit is delicious, juicy and fibreless. The ripe fruit looks greenish. The tree of this variety is very large and each tree bears fruits in abundance.However the tree cannot tolerate stormy wind. This variety should be propagated by planting grafts.

Fig: 6 Langra Mango

Page 32: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Fruits 27

Gopalbhog The Gopalbhog is one of the superior varieties of mango. This mango variety can be grown in all the districts of Bangladesh. It is extremely very sweet, good flavored, fibreless and juicy. The colour mango remains greenish even after it is ripe. The skin is very thin and the seed is very small. The average weight of a fully matured mango is about 250 grams. It is one of the, early varieties of mango. The Gopalbhog variety starts repening from the mid-Jaishtha to mid Ashar. The stalk of Gopalbhog mango is strong enough and so the fruits do not fall down due to stormy wind. The yield of the Gopalbhog is high and the fruit bearing by the trees is regular. This variety of mango should be propagated through grafts. Selection of land Mango plants may be grown in most of the soils of Bangladesh. But deep and well drained alluvial soil are more suitable for mango gardening. Mango seedlings do not grow in saline and alkali soil. A land selected for growing mango plants should have a depth of about two meters and water layer within the sub-soil in the range of 3-4 meters. The selection of appropriate land is necessary for quality mango trees. Preparation of land The time for preparing the land for planting mango trees is Baishakh and Jaishtha. At first the land should be ploughed and cross ploughed followed by laddering. All the weeds from the land should be cleared and the land should be levelled so that water logging does not occur. Drainage system should be made within the plot as per topography so that excess water, if any, can be removed from the field easily and rapidly. The seedlings should be planted at the beginning or at the later part of the rainy season. After preparation of the land properly, pits with the size of 1m x 1m x 1m should be made at a distance of 10 meters. The soils of the upper and lower portions should be kept separate. The pit should be kept open for 2-4 weeks so that sun rays can reach the bottom of the pits and this causes destroy harmful germs. The required amount of fertilizer should be mixed in two equal parts with the soil of upper and lower parts of the pits before filling them. Then the pits should be left for at least two weeks. First the soil mixed with fertilizers from the upper portion should be put at the bottom of the pits and thosefrom lower portion should be brought to the surface of the pit. The quantities of fertilizer for use in each mango pit are as follows.

Page 33: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

28 Agricultural Education

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of Fertilizer per pit Well rotten cow dung 25 kg Bone meal or TSP 2 kg/ 750gram Mustard oil cake 1 Kg Wood ash or muriate of potash 5 Kg/ 400 gram.

Planting Seedlings

The suitable time for planting mango tree is at the beginning or end of the rainy season. The seedling should be planted by removing some surface soil of the pit centre at the time of planting. After planting the seedling the base of the plant should be slightly raised with soils available around the pit. Care should always be given so that base of the seedling is not placed far below the soil surface. A irrigation should be given after the planting the seedlings. Water Irrigation will be needed at an interval of 2-3 days if there is any drought. Wind stormy may harm the base of the seedlings and holes may be created at the base. If water enters through these holes seedling may be spoiled. So to protect the seeding from movement, a strong stick should be placed near the seeding tied to it.

Post- Plantation Cultural Practices :

Clearing out the weed : Care should be taken so that weeds do not grow at the base of the planted seedling. Weeds are very harmful for young seedlings. That is why weeds should be uprooted without delay. Weeds should be cleared from the filed at least twice a year, firstly, at the onset of the rainy season and secondly, at the end of the rainy season.

Water irrigation : As mango plants are deep rooted, is not always essential. But for lengthy dry season, is essential. Under such irrigated water irrigation should be applied in the field at least two twice month. If soil water is found to be deficit in the month of Kartik the mango garden land may be ploughed 3-4 times followed by laddering to retain the moisture of the soil. Irrigation should be stopped once the tree begins flowering. But after flowering or once the fruit starts growing irrigation needs to be renowned.

Conservation of soil moisture : Use of straw and water hyacinth at the base of the mango tree helps to conserve soil moisture.

Drainage of excess water : Care should be taken so that these is no water logging at the base of the plant. In case of excess rainfall, arrangements should be made for drainage so that the excess rain water flow out of the garden.

Page 34: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Fruits 29

Pruning flowers : If a newly planted mango tree produces flowers within three years, the flowers should be pruned.

Pruning tree branches : The disarranged cross branches fully under shade should carefully be pruned. The branches showing sings of diseases and infections should also be carefully pruned.

Application of fertilizer : The application of the quantity of the fertilizers depends mainly on the age of the Plant. The following doses of fertilizer may be followed for applying in the mango gardens.

Age of Seedling

or plant Name of the

fertilizer Quantity of Fertilizer

Method of Fertilizer Application

Growing stage after planting

Urea TSP MP

200 Grams 200 Grams 200 Grams

The fertilizer should be applied mixing these with the 10-12 centimeter depth into soils, 30 centimeter away from the base of the plant.

One year after Planting

Cow dung Urea TSP MP

6-7Kg 200 grams 200grams 200 grams

Do

Fruiting tree (Every year)

Cow dung Urea TSP MP

Zipsum Zinc sulphate

50 kg 2 kg 1kg

500gm 500gm 25gm

All the fertilizers should be applied mixing these with the 15 centimeter depth soils of the area in two installments where the shade of the plant appears at the noon, 50 cm away from the base of the plant.

The quantity of fertilizers may be increased every year by 20 per cent with the growth of the plant.

Page 35: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

30 Agricultural Education

Diseases of Mango

Powdery mildew: The powdery mildew disease of mango is found in all mango cultivating areas of the country. The disease is found to attack at the time of the inflorescence and fruit setting. Excess humidity coludy weather and lower temperature help the spread of the powdery mildew disease of mango. The main characteristic symptoms of the disease is the greyish white powdery spots that are found on the flower and little fruit. This causes death of the inflorescence and dropping of the little fruits. Thus a full destruction of the crop may happen. As preventive measure 2gm thiovit should be mixed with 1 litre water and be sprayed before flowering .

Anthracnose : Anthracnose disease is found to occur under excessive rainfall and high humid condition. The leaves, inflorescence and fruits may be attacked by this disease. The characteristic symptom of this disease is that black spots developed on the infested place. Then the branches and flowers die, the flowers drop instead of fruiting . The disease may be controlled by spraying Bordeaux mixture over the foliage 3-4 time at an interval of 15 days.

Bordeaux mixture may easily be prepared. For preparing Bordeaux mixture 1 litre water 100gm copper sulphate and 100 gm lime are required. At first half of the water should be taken in a pot and the copper sulphate should be taken in a clean piece of cloth and it should be dipped in the water. Lime should be taken in another pot and the rest of the water should be added slowly to make the lime solution cool. Now the copper sulphate solution and lime solution should be mixed together to form the bordeaux mixture.

Canker : The characteristic symptom of canker disease is the spread of water soaked spots on the leaves and fruits. Later on these spots turn black. The diseased fruits are found to produce crack in lengthwise direction and some secretion is found along the cracks. As soon as the disease appears bordeaux mixture must be sprayed 3-4 times at 15 days interval.

Insects of Mango : The Mango trees and mango fruits are found to be attacked with about 20-25 different types of insects and pests. Among these insects (1) mango fruit borer (2) mango fruit fly (3) mango hopper cause serious damages to mango production.

Page 36: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Fruits 31

Mango fruit borer : After fruit setting when the mango starts growing the female mango fruit borer lays eggs on the surface of the fruits. The eggs are covered with a hard black layer. Larvae coming out from the eggs then enters making pores through the fruit flesh and starts eating the young flesh of the fruits. But the surface of the pores gradually get closed . The larvae eats the flesh of the mango internally for about a month. Then the larvae converts to the pupa stage and remains the same for about two weeks. Then the pupa gradually transformers to an adult insect and comes out of the mango fruit making pores and tunnels. The following measures may be taken for preventing mango fruit borer.

1. Weeds and parasites of the mango gardens should be removed through uprooting and cutting.

2. Phenyl water may be sprayed on the cracks of the plants.

3. The insect infested green mango should be harvested and destroyed.

4. Dimecron of about 14 c.c.(0.03%) may by mixed in 7.5 litters of water and sprayed 2-4 times over the foliage at an interval of 15 days.

Mango fruit fly : Mango fruit fly is very harmful for mango. The female fly lays about 150-200 eggs under the skin before of the mango fruit it ripen. The eggs hatch and produces larvae which enters the flesh of the mango and starts eating the flesh. This causes the mango to rot. Infestation of the insect cannot be identified. Nine line ml dipterex (02%) may be mixed with four litres of water and it may be sprayed 3-4 times at an interval of 15 days when the fruits mature.

Mango hoppers : Mango hoppers can seriously damage mango tree both in larvae and adult stages through eating leaves, young twigs, sucking flower sap and thus reducing mango production to a great extent.

Mango hoppers may be controlled by spraying ripcord 10 EC one ml or sumicidin 20 EC 0.5 ml. diluting it in one litre of water and it may be sprayed at least twice at an interval of 15 days before flowering.

Page 37: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

32 Agricultural Education

Harvesting of Mango Fruit

The production of mango gradually increases as the tree grow older. A graft mango tree can produce 15-20 mango at the age of five years. While 400- 600 mangoes may be produced in such a tree at an age of 10 years. The yield of mango increases up to the age of about 40 years.

The mango should be harvested before it starts to ripen and charge colour. A small net for holding mangoes may be fixed at the apex of a long bamboo and may used in mango harvesting.

After harvesting, the mango may be kept in a store house arranged in layers. The mango fruits should be packed properly while sending to distant markets. The mango fruits may be packed separately with soft tissue papers and may be kept in hard paper boxes. A batch of 50 mangoes may be packed in a bamboo busket making layers with staw in it.

Litchi

In Bangladesh litchi is a very popular fruit. This fruit is superior in taste, flavour and nutrient content. The origin of its cultivation is the South Eastern region of China. Litchi plants are grown in almost all the districts of Bangladesh. But good quality litchies are produced in Rajshah, Dinajpur, Jessore, Kushtia, Mymensing, Dhaka and Chittagong.

Varieties of Litchi

There are many varieties of litchi cultivated in Bangladesh. These varieties are brought from abroad. The different varieties cultivated in Bangladesh are briefly discussed below.

1. Bari litchi I : This is a high yielding type of early variety. This variety is oval shape and it is red in colour. The weight varies from 18-20 grams. It is cultivated in the northern part of county.

2. China No-3 : This Variety of litchi was collected from China to Bangladesh many years ago.. Among the varieties of litchi in Bangladesh the China no-3 is the best. The shape of the fruit is round. It is also known as Bedena as its seed is very small. This variety of litchi is very sweet.

Fig : 9 The Litchi

Page 38: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Fruits 33

3. China No- 1 : This variety of litchi was also collected from china long ago. This is also a good variety of litchi but a bit inferior to the China no-3 variety.

4. Bombay litchi : it is a hybrid variety.This variety is very attractive in size and colour. This litchi is slightly acidic intaste. This variety of litchi is widely cultivated in Jessore and Kustia.

5. Mangalbari litchi : This litchi is cultivated in the district of Mymensingh. This variety is medium in quality.

6. Mujaffarpuri : This is a very good variety. Its yield is more than other common varieties. All the fruits do not ripen at a time and so the fruit is available for longer period.

Selection of Land :

Deep silt loamy soils are most suitable for litchi cultivation. If the drainage facility is available, litchi plants may be grown in other soils too. However, sandy soils are not suitable for litchi plantation. Litchi may be grown well in acidic soils. So acidic and deep silt loamy soils should be selected for litchi plantation.

Preparation of Land

The land selected for litchi plantation should be deeply ploughed and cross ploughed in the month of Falgun and Chaitra. The field should be made free from all weeds and the whole plot should be levelled. Arrangements should be made by preparing drains in the field so that rain water can not create water logging. The optimum time of planting litchi tree is either the onset of rainy season or the end of the rainy season. The trees are usually planted in pits made at a distance of 8-10 meters. The size of the pit should be 1m × 1m ×1m. The soils of upper and lower portions should be kept separately. The pit should be kept open for at least two weeks.

The upper portion soils of the pits should be mixed with the following fertilizer before filling them up. After filling the pits with the soil fertilizer mixture, the pits should be left for two weeks so that soils and fertilizers get well mixed during the period.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-5

Page 39: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

34 Agricultural Education

Name of the fertilizer Quantity of the Fertilizer Well rotten cowdung 20 Kg

Bone meal or

Triple super phosphate

2 Kg

1 Kg Rotten Oil cake 2 Kg

Wood ash or Muriate of potash

5 Kg 500 grams.

Planting Seedlings

The most suitable month for planting litchi seedling is Jaishtha. At this time the soil of the pits should be made loose. The planting should be done at the center of the pit. It is better to plant healthy and strong guti layers or grafts. The grafts or layers should be planted in such a manner, so that the base of the plants do not go far below the soil surface level. The base of the plant should be raised by five centimeter from the surrounding. With soils from the sides to the base. The plant should be tied with a stick so that its base do not move due to does the wind. After that a light irrigation should be given for moistening the soil.

Post- Planting Cultural Practices :

1. Keeping the garden weed free: The base ground of the litchi plant should be kept free from weeds. The plantation area should be deeply spaded at last twice a year and all the weeds should be uprooted.

2. Irrigation : At least two irrigation should be given to litchi garden when drought, occurs.

3. Conservation soil moisture : Moisture content of the soil may be conserved by using water hyacinth at the base of the plant during the months Kartik and Agrahayon. Cultivation of Arharca kind of pules in such a garden helps to conserve soil moisture and enrich the soil with nutrient elements.

4. Application of fertilizers : In order to get satisfactory fruit production from a litchi garden, it is essential to apply sufficient quantities of fertilizers every year. A fertilizer chart, based on the age of the litchi plant to be applied is given below.

Page 40: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Fruits 35

Age of the plant Name of the fertilizer Quantity of the Fertilizer

1-2 Years Urea Muriate of Potash

250 gm 250 gm

3-4 Years Well rotten cowdung Urea

Muriate of potash Triple super phosphate

25 Kg 500 gm 500 gm 300 gm

Fruiting trees Well rotten cowdung Urea

Muriate of potash

Triple super phosphate

50 Kg 1Kg 1 Kg

600 gm.

The quality of fertilizers should be divided in two parts. One part should be applied at the beginning of rainy season while the rest half should be applied at the end of the rainy season. The fertilizers should be applied at a distance of 50 cm from the base of the plant covering the shade of the plant during noon time and the fertilizers should be mixed well with the soil.

Pruning of Litchi Plant 1. Normally pruning is not so important for litchi plants. But to have a good shape and size

of the plant, litchi plant requires pruning up to three years of age. Side branches should be allowed when the main trunk of the litchi plant grows to a height of two meters.

2. At the time of harvesting litchi fruits from the tree, some parts of tiny branches and leaves are taken along with the fruits. Such a breaking of twigs also helps in pruning of the plant and this enhances new shoot growth.

3. Some times the litchi plant becomes heavily foliaged with new shoot and leaf growth. This reduces the yield of the fruit. To get a good harvest some portion of branches and twigs are required to be pruned .In some cases, root pruning may also be done for good harvest.

4. For sufficient light and air, necessary branches should be pruned. 5. As the tree grows older, its production reduces. However application of two kg of Urea

per plant after pruning, at the end rainy season, may increase normal crop production and also increase the size of the fruits.

Page 41: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

36 Agricultural Education

Harvesting of fruits

For family consumption or for selling litchi in the nearby market, the litchi should be

harvested at full ripening stage. But for selling litchi at distant markets, the fruits should be

harvested just when the fruits start getting colour. Litchies are usually harvested in bunches.

The bunches are made with 25, 50 or 100 number of fruits per bundle. After harvesting, the

bunches are packed in bamboo made basket with fruit leaves. After this, they are sent to the

market.

Yield of Fruits

If proper care is taken, a litchi plant can produce fruits up to 100 years of age. The yield of

litchi may vary with its age. However, the average yield of a fully matured tree may be 80-

150kg.

Jack Fruit

Jack fruit is the national fruit of Bangladesh. As the original place of jack fruit is Bangladesh,

this fruits has been given the status of the National Fruit. For its diversified use this limit very

much popular among the inhabitants of Bangladesh. no others fruit in Bangladesh is

comparable to this fruit. This fruit has much economic importance.

Some characteristics of jack fruit are briefly mentioned below.

1. Jack fruit is the largest of all the fruits available in Bangladesh.

2. This fruit is highly nutritious.

3. Each component of the fruit can be used properly.

4. Many nutritious food items can be prepared from jack fruit. Green jack fruits and seeds of

jack fruit are eaten as very high quality vegetables.

Jack fruit can be cultivated in most of the districts of Bangladesh. But the production of jack fruit is high in Dhaka. Sylhet, Mymensingh, Rangpur, and Jessore districts.

Page 42: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Fruits 37

Varieties Of Jack Fruit

The varieties of jack fruit available in Bangladesh have no specific names. The varieties of jack fruit are different in size, shape, skin, fruitlet (kosh or koa) taste, etc. the tree bear fruits once a year . However some of the varieties may produce fruits twice a year. According to the qualities of the fruitlets or koa all the jack fruit may be divided into three groups. These groups are : 1. Hard koa jack fruit variety : The jack

fruit which has hard friutlets or koa is

known as hard jack fruit variety.

2. Half Soft Koa Variety: The jack fruit which has fruitlets with soft front portion and hard back portion is known as half soft koa variety.

3. Soft Koa Jack Fruit Variety : The jack fruit which has very soft fruitlets of very juicy koa is known as soft koa jack fruit. Usually early maturity variety of jack fruit areof soft koa type and the late maturity jack fruit are found to be hard koa type.

Selection of land

Most of the soil above the flood level are suitable for plantation of jack fruit

trees. But the production of jack fruit becomes higher when it is grown in deep well drained soft and loamy soils. The production of jack fruit is also high in acid red soil.

Jack fruit cannot withstand water logging. So deep, well drained silty, loam soils or acid red high land soil etc. should be selected for plantation of jack fruit.

Preparation of land

The land for jack fruit plantation should be ploughed and cross ploughed for 5-6 times and should be leveled by laddering and the field should be made weed free by cleaning all the weeds. Care should be taken at the time of laddering so that the land becomes nicely levelled according to the topography. Then at about one month before planting, pits of the size of 1x 1 x 1 meter should be made at a distance of 10 meters from one to another. While making the pits the upper soil and the lower soils of the pits should be kept separately. The pits should be kept open for about two weeks so that the pits get dried.

Fig. 10: Jack fruit

Page 43: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

38 Agricultural Education

The upper layer of soils in the pits, should be mixed with the fertilizers mentioned below and then the soils should be put at the bottom of the pits. The lower soils should be brought to the surface portion of the pits.

After application of the fertilizer mixed soils in the pits, it is necessary to wait for another two weeks so that the soil and the added fertilizers get well mixed and become ready for planting jack fruit trees.

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

Well rotten cowdung 30 Kg

Mustard oil cake 2 Kg

Bone meal or

Triple super phosphate

500gm

Or

250gm

Wood ash

or

Muriate of potash

4 Kg

or

250gm.

Planting of seedling

Jack fruit tree may be planted from seedling produced from seeds or from vegetatively prepared grafts. The best time for planting jack fruit seedling is Sraban and Bhadra. The seedling should be placed at the centre of the pit making a small hole. It is good if planting is done on a rain free day and the seedling should is planted in such a manner that it remains at the soil level depth where it was grown in the seed bed originally. If it is frequently irrigated, the soil crust may be formed. The soil crust should be broken with a hoe. The jack fruit plant cannot tolerate water logging. So the base of the seedling should be slightly raised by taking some soils from the sides to the base of the seedling. The seedling should tightly be tied with a strong stick , so that it can not move due to wind.

Post Planting Cultural Practices

Giving hedge : The tender leaves of jack fruit trees are very palatable food for cattle and goats. So, to protect the jack fruit seedling from cattle and goats a strong hedge should be given.

Page 44: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Fruits 39

Clearing of weeds : The grounds should be heed and weeded at least twice a year. These should be done once before the rainy season and all aim at the end of the rainy season.

Irrigation : Irrigation of water is required during the drought period. If there is serious scarcity of water, the soil around the tree may be shallowly heed and water hyacinth may be spread over there to conserve soil moisture. Irrigation should also be continued before and after flowering and initiation (muchi) stages.

Application of Fertilizer : the following fertilizers may be applied for each jack fruit plant every years.

Age of jack fruit plant Name of the fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

2-5 years Well rotten cowdung

Urea

Tripple super phosphate

Muriate of potash

30 Kg

400gm

5oogm

45o gm

Fruiting trees Well rotten cowdung

Urea

Tripple super phosphate

Muriate of potash

50 Kg

1 Kg

500 gm

1kg

pruning and Trimming : The dead branches, and cross branches should be pruned after harvesting of the fruits.

Inter Cropping : Ginger, turmeric, etc. plants may be planted as inter crops under the shade of jack fruit trees. Such inter cropping ensures the after care of jack fruit trees and additional crop.

Harvesting of Jack Fruit :

The jack fruit tree starts production at the age of 6-7 years from planting. The fruits of a jack fruit tree, ripe at different times. So, only the matured jack fruits should be harvested time to time. The maturity of a jack fruit may be determined by finger bidding . A jack fruit usually takes three months to become matured from the time of fruiting or ‘ muchi’ formation. It is not wise to allow jack fruits to ripen in the tree. A full grown jack fruit tree can produce more than 1000 Kg fruits every year.

Page 45: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

40 Agricultural Education

Exercise Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. Which one is a long term fruit?

a. Jamrul b. Lemon

c. Guava d. Shaddock (Jambura)

2. Oval shaped and red coloured litchi grow in—

i. Khulna

ii. Dinajpur

iii. Lalmonirhat

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. i & iii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos 3 & 4.

Though the mangoes of Anwar’s house of Gajipur are small in size, they are very sweet. But

the mangoes cannot be eaten due to the attack of insects. So he brought some grafted plants

of Fazli variety of mango from Rajshahi and took care regularly after planting. Within some

years the new plants produced fruits. But it was observed that these mangoes did not grow

large like those of Rajshahi. Besides a type of insects ate up the seeds and made pores on the

mango.

3. The mangoes produced in Anwar’s new plants are small in size because of

a. Want of fertilizer. b. Spoiling of soil quality.

c. Want of water. d. Characteristics of weather.

4. By which of the following the attack of insects in mangoes can be controlled?

a. Dipterex and water. b. Sumisidin and dimecron

c. Carbiclon and theovit. d. Water and dimecron

Page 46: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Fruits 41

Creative Questions (CQ)

1. Mamun of Mymensing thought to establish a fruit garden in his village home to bring

economic solvency. Considering the location and characteristics of the land he

decided to cultivate hard koa jack fruit variety. Then he prepared a landscape of

square size and brought 16 plants from the nearby nursery.

a. What is hard koa jack fruit variety?

b. Explain one characteristic of Mamun’s land.

c. Present Mamun’s jack fruit garden drawing a figure.

d. Analyze how Mamun can get economic success through jack fruit cultivation.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-6

Page 47: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 5

Cultivation of Vegetables

About 50 types of vegetable of crops are cultivated in Bangladesh. Mainly these vegetables are cultivated in winter and summer. Besides, there are many vegetables which are grown through out the year. Among the winter vegetables potato, tomato, cabbage, cauliflower, radish, country bean , bottle gourd, sweet gourd, spinach, etc. are important. The summer vegetables are mainly ash gourd, bitter gourd, ribbed, palwal gourd, snake gourd, cucumber, lady’s finger okra, Indian spinach, etc. The vegetables like brinajal, amarainth etc. may cultivated throughout the year. The production of vegetables may be increased by applying scientific methods.

Potato

Potato is the principal vegetable of Bangladesh. In some country potato is the staple food. As a staple food, potato stands next to wheat in Bangladesh. It is possible to reduce food deficit by increasing the production of potato . So it is very important to encourage scientific cultivation of potato.

Varieties :

Potato has many indigenous and exotic varities. Some important varieties of potato are mentioned below. Country indigenous varieties : Lal pakhri, Shil Bilati, Hagrai, Endurkari.

Exotic :

Cardinal, Malta, Petroness, Kifri sunduri, Diamant, Heera, Chamak Ailsa, Moreni, Mondial, Cleopetra, Binnela, Granola

Selection of Land

Potato grows well in well drained loamy and sandy loam soils, free sunshine and open air are needed for potato cultivation.

Fig : 11 Potato

Page 48: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Vegetables 43

Preparation of Land Just after rainy season, land should be made loose through 4-5 ploughing and cross ploughing followed by laddering at the end of the rainy season. Large clods should be broken for the purpose. The land should carefully be levelled and irrigation and drainage channels should be made.

Seed Rate

Tubers are mainly used as seed for cultivation of potato in Bangladesh. The seed rate per hectare of land is 1.5- 2.0 tone and 6-8 kg per decimal of land. The size of each tuber seed should be 28-45 mm. If the size of the tuber seed is more than 45 mm. it should be cut into two pieces. Care should be taken while cutting a tuber so that at least two viable eyes are present in each piece.

Sowing of Seeds

The suitable time for sowing potato tuber seeds is from the middle of Aswin to middle of Agrahayon. Potato seeds are sown in line. The distance between two lines is 60-70 cm. The distance between one tuber to another tuber is 20 cm and the tuber should be placed five cm under the soil. The tuber seeds should be kept covered under wet coarse cloth or gunny cloth (chat) for 48 hours before planting.

Application of Fertilizers

Potato absorbs large quantities of nutrient elements from the soil. So, sufficient quantities of fertilizer should be applied for higher yield of potato. The quantity of fertilizer to be applied per hectare and per decimal is shown below :

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

(per hectare)

Quantity of the fertilizer

(per Decimal)

Well rotten cowdung 10 tons 40 kg

Urea 220 kg 800 gm

Triple super phosphate 150 kg 600 gm

Muriate of potash 220 kg 800gm

The cowdung should be mixed with be soil at the time of land preparation. The triple super phosphate should be applied at the time of final land preparation. Urea and muriate of potash should be applied in two equal splits. The first split should be applied 15-20 days after the emergence of plants and the second split should be applied after one month through side dressing.

Page 49: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

44 Agricultural Education

Cultural Practices

1. Clearing weeds : Some weeds may appear in the field when potato plants attain a height of 15 cm. Weeding should be done in between potato lines carefully .

2. Earthing up : The soil between the interline spaces should be given to the base of the potato plants. This earthing up should be completed in 2-3 times, not at a time. Thus the space between the potato lines take the shape of a channel.

3. Irrigation : Production of potato needs much water. Potato fields should be requires adequate supply of waterirrigated at least four times. After irrigation hard crusts may be formed and these crusts should be broken through spading or nirani to make the soil loose.

4. Control of a pests : The potato crops are prone to be infested by various pests. The aphid sucks the plant sap and spreads virus diseases. Applications of dimecron nuvacron. etc. insecticides can control the infestations of these insects.

5. Potato diseases : a fungal disease called late blight disease causes harms to potato cultivation . The widespread attacks of the crop by this disease may cause complete failure of the crop. The diseases may be controlled through the application of Dithane M-45 or Ridomil-72

Harvesting of Crop

Potato crops may be harvested within 3-4 months after sowing. When the colour of potato plant starts yellowing, it means that the time for potato harvesting is up. However potato should be harvested when the plant starts drying fully. Potato should be harvested carefully so that in the tuber potato requires infact and undamaged.

After harvesting, the potato tubers should be kept in a cool shade for 7-8 days before storing. Before storing in the godown, or the cold storage infested tubers and other diseased tubers should be discarded .

Production of potato

The usual yield of potato in our country is on average 10 tons per hectare or about 40 kg per decimal of land. This production of potato is very low. When good varieties of potato are cultivated scientifically , its yield may be raised to 20 tons per hectare or 80 kg per decimal.

Page 50: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Vegetables 45

Radish

Radish and radish leaves are very nutritious vegetables. Radish is widely cultivated in Bangladesh. Radish may be eaten as curry after cooking. Green radish may be eaten as salad. Radish is mainly cultivated in the winter season. Now a days, wherever high land there is radish may also be cultivated in the rainy season. But these are not as tasty as the winter radish.

Varieties

There are many varieties of radish. Among these the most uncommon are Red Bombay, Tasakisun, Miasige, Minoearly, Pinky, etc. These are high yielding and of superior quality.

Selection of land

Sandy loam soils are most suitable for cultivating radish. However, radish may be cultivated in all loamy soil land. The lands where green manuring has been done previously should be selected for radish cultivation.

Preparation of land

The optimum time for radish cultivation is from middle of Bhadra to Ahwin. The land should be prepared very carefully for radish cultivation. Finer tilth of soil yields if radish. For land preparation of radish, it has been mentioned in the book of ‘Khanr Bachan’ to do 16 ploughing and crops ploughing .

Application of fertilizers

Application of fertilizers in the field is necessary for getting good yield of radish. The quantity of fertilizers to be applied for radish cultivation per hectare of land is given below.

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer (per Hectare)

Quantity of the fertilizer (per Decimal)

Well rotten cowdung 8-10 tons 20-25 kg Urea 200 kg 800 gm Tripple super phosphate 150 kg 600 gm

Muriate of potash 200 kg 800gm

Fig : 12 Radish

Page 51: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

46 Agricultural Education

The whole of cowdung, triple super phosphate and half the quantity of muriate of potash should be applied at the time of land preparation. The full quantity of urea and the rest half of the muriate of potash should be applied in 2-3 equal splits after the germination of seeds.

Sowing of Seed

The seeds of radish may be sown both in line system and broadcast system. The rate of seed sowing is given blow :

Methods of seed sowing Seed rate

(per Hectare)

Seed rate

(per Decimal)

Growing in lines 5-6kg 20-28 gm

Sowing in broadcast 10-12 kg 40-48 gm

If radish is cultivated for leafy vegetable only, its seed rate should be doubled.When seeds are broadcast, the sown seed are mixed with the soil through ploughing and cross ploughing followed by alternate laddering. For line sowing, it is at first necessary to draw lines 30 cm apart with the help of ropes from one to the other end of the prepared land. Then shallow furrows should be made with the help of smaller ploughs. Radish seeds may be sown in these furrows at a distance of 4-5 cm and to a depth of two and the seeds should be covered with fine soils.

Cultural Practices

Thining of Plants : Seeds of radish usually takes 3-4 days to germinate after sowing. If the seedlings are found to be thickly,some of the plants should be taken out within a period of 8-10 days. Then a second thining may be done within a period of 20-25 days. More thinning may be done if necessary.

Clearing weeds : The weeds grown in the radish field should be uprooted at the time of every thinning process.

Applying irrigation: Sufficient irrigation is required applied for a good in radish crop. Dry, hard, and fibrous quality radish are produced when radish field suffers from dryness. However, excess irrigation may also cause rottening of the radish plants. After irrigation, the soil crusts, if formed any, should be pulverized and the soil should be kept loose.

Page 52: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Vegetables 47

Harvesting of Crop Radish harvesting may be started from the field 3-4 weeks after sowing of seeds. The young green radish is sold in the market after washing it with water and cutting the apex of the leaves. Production of Radish The production of radish may be 30-35 tons per hectare and 100-120 kg per decimal of land. Cauliflower Cauliflower is a winter vegetable crop. Though the origin of cauliflower is exotic, it is being cultivated in Bangladesh for many years. The cauliflower is mainly cultivated in the sub-urban and other places which are nearer to town. The cultivation of cauliflower in rural area is limited. This vegetable is liked by both urban and rural people. Variety There are many varieties of cauliflower. According to the time of sowing seeds and harvesting crops. These varieties may be classified into three groups, such as early variety , middle variety and late variety. The important varieties of these three groups are mentioned below : Early varieties : Early snow ball, Kartika, Agrahayani, Tropical snow 55. Middle varieties : Poushali, Rakkushi, Snow ball M, Suprimax. Late varieties : Maghi late snow ball, Snow ball-x, Rupa.

The early varieties of cauliflower may be harvested in the months of Kartik and Agrahayon. The middle varieties may be harvested in the month of poush and the late varieties in the months of Magh and Falgun.

Fig : 13 Cauliflower

Page 53: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

48 Agricultural Education

Selection of land

The land with free sunshine should be selected for cauliflower cultivation. The fertile soils of loamy texture is most suitable for cauliflower cultivation. Cauliflower may also be cultivated applying sufficient organic manure in clay, loamy or sandy loamy soil. The early varieties of cauliflower should be grown in high lands, while for the late varieties low land may be selected for cultivation.

Preparation of Land

At the end of the rainy season, the land should be prepared by ploughing and cross ploughing several times at the appropriate conditions. The land should be prepared giving the soil a fine tilth. The land should be completely cleared of weeds. If the land for cauliflower cultivation is green manured at the beginning of the rainy season, the fertility level of the land will be improved and the production will also be satisfactory.

Application of Fertilizers

The land for cauliflower cultivation should have a high level of fertility. To make the soil more fertile the following fertilizers are :

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

(per Hectare)

Quantity of the fertilizer

(per Decimal)

Well rotten cowdung 15 tons 100 kg

Urea 250 kg 1 kg

Triple super phosphate 150 kg 600 gm

Muriate of potash 175 kg 700gm

Mustard oil cake 500 kg 2kg

Half of the total quantity of cowdung, oil cake and triple super phosphate should be applied at the time of land preparation. The rest half of the cowdung, oilcake and triple super phosphate should be applied in the small holes made for planting cauliflower seedling. These fertilizers should be well mixed with the soil in the holes. The size of the hole or the small pit should be of 20 cm in length 20 cm width and 15 cm depth. One week time should be given for the fertilizers to get well mixed with the pit soil before planting the seedling . The urea and muriate of potash fertilizers should be applied in three equal splits. The first split should be given after 2-3 weeks of planting seedling. The second split should be applied after 20-25 days of first split application. and the third split may be applied just before the flowering stage of the

Page 54: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Vegetables 49

cauliflower plants. Care must be taken so that fertilizers do not come in direct touch of the tiny leaves or base of the plants.

Production of Seedling

Seeds of cauliflower may be sown in the months of Bhadra to Kartik. Seed beds are required to be made for raising cauliflower seedlings. A seed bed of 3 meter x 1 meter is required for sowing 12 grams of seeds.

A shallow layer of brick pieces, khoa, etc, may be given at a depth of 20 cm of the seed bed covered with fertile soil in such a way so that the surface of the seed bed is raised by 10 cm from the land surface. Some quantity of well rotten cowdung and urea should be mixed with the seed bed soil to make it suitable for seedling production. Then the seeds should be broadcasted on the surface of the seed bed. and the surface of the seed bed should slightly be compacted by giving pressure with flat wood piece. It should be carefully noticed that the seeds do not enter the soil more than two cm. The seeds normally germinate within 3-4 days after sowing. The seed bed should be covered by a shade toprotect it from the direct effects of sunshine and rainfall. These seedling may be planted in the main field at the age of 4-5 weeks.

Planting of Seedling

The distance between each row of seedling depends on the characteristic of the varieties selected for cultivation. The usual distance between the rows for cauliflower is 60 cm and the distance from seedling to seedling within a line is 50 cm. Early varieties may be given. A more closer spacing, that is more number of seedlings may be planted per unit of land. The spacing for larger sized cauliflower verities should be increased to 75 cm. from line to line. Small pits should be made according to measured size and spacing and the seedlings should be planted in those small pits. The best time for planting seedlings is the evening. After planting light and regular watering should be done up to the 3-4 day of planting in the morning and evening.

Cultural Practices

Loosening of the soil : The soil between two lines should be loosened two weeks after planting of the seedling. Weeds should also be uprooted and cleared at the same time.

Applying irrigation water: Four to five days after every split application of the fertilizers, irrigation should be applied to the cauliflower fields. The soil should be loosened when the ‘jo’ condition appears after irrigation.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-7

Page 55: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

50 Agricultural Education

Control of insect pests: Cauliflowers are commonly attacked by like pests, flies, aphids, cut worms and butterflies. These insect may be controlled by light-trap and getting rid of the clusters of eggs on leaves.

Harvesting of Cauliflower

The best time for the cauliflower to be harvested is when the flower is compact and tight. A flower may be harvested after 3-4 month of plantation. After harvesting, the leaves of the flower are cut in such a manner that some portions of the leaves cover the flower and this covering protects it from damage during transportation.

Yield of Cauliflower

Each yield of cauliflower may be as much as 20 tons per hectare or about 80 kg per decimal of land.

Cabbage

Cabbage is a highly nutritious vegetable. It is an exotic vegetable. Cabbage is mainly cultivated in Bangladesh in the winter season. It is being cultivated in this country since a long time. Cabbage is a popular vegetable both in the urban and rural areas. But its cultivation is mostly limited to the sub-urban areas. However, cultivation of cabbage is rapidly expanding in the rural areas.

Varieties of Cabbage

There are many varieties of cabbage in Bangladesh. Of these some are early varieties, some are middle varieties and some are late varieties. The major varieties under these groups are mentioned below :

Early varieties : Jercey wake filed, Copen Hagen

market, Atlas- 7, Agradut.

Middle varieties : Golden acre, Kohinoor, Drum head,

Autumn king Pravati.

Late varieties : Danish ball head, K-Y cross, Savoy.

Selection of land High land and medium high land with open sunshine should be selected for cabbage cultivation . The soil of the land should be loamy and fertile. The soil should have the texture of sandy loam if it is cultivated in the rainy season.

Fig : 14 Cabbage

Page 56: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Vegetables 51

Preparation of land

The land for cultivation of cabbage should be prepared finely and efficiently. The land may be deeply cultivated through ploughing and cross ploughing followed by laddering to make the soil loose. The weeds should be cleared during land preparation and the land should be levelled.

Application of Fertilizer : The land for cabbage cultivation should be of high fertility. The cabbage land may be fertlized with green manures at the beginning of the rainy season. The recommended doses of fertilizer given below may be applied to increase the fertility of the land.

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

(per hectare)

Quantity of the fertilizer

(per Decimal)

Well rotten cowdung 25 tons 100 kg

Urea 250 kg 1 kg

Triple super phosphate 125 kg 500 gm

Muriate of potash 150 kg 600gm

Oil cake 500 kg 2 kg

Half the quantity of cowdung, oil cake, triple super phosphate should be mixed with the soil during land preparation. The rest of the fertilizers should be applied in the pits prepared for planting cabbage seedlings. The fertilizers should be well mixed with the pits and surrounding soils. The size of the pits should be 20 cm in width and 15 cm in depth. The fertilized pit soils should be allowed to stay for one week before plantation. After planting the seedling in the field, the urea and the muriate of potash fertilizers should be applied in three equal splits at different times.

Planning & Seeding : The cabbage seeds may be sown in the seed bed from the month of Bhadra to Kartik. After the soil is made ready for sowing. The size of the seed bed should be three meters long and one meter wide. Seed rate for cabbage production is 150-180 grams per hectare of land and 7-9 grams per decimal of land.

A small quantity of broken of bricks or stone should be placed 20 cm below the seed bed, then a layer of fertile loamy soil should be added in such a way that it is raised by 10 cm from the original level of the land. Some quantities of rotten cowdung and urea may be applied to the seed bed to increase the fertility of the soil. After sowing seeds, the surface of the seed bed should be compact turned with Help of a flat

Page 57: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

52 Agricultural Education

piece wood. Care should be taken so that the seeds do not go more than 2 cm deep. The seeds will germinate within 3-4days after sowing. Arrangement should be made for a shade to protect the tiny seedling from rainfall, storms and other calamities. The seedling may be planted in the main field after 4-5 weeks of germination.

Transplanting Cabbage Seedlings

The seedling of cabbage should be transplanted in line. The distance between lines should be 60 cm and the distance from seedling to seedling should be 50 cm. It cultivated in the rainy season, it can be planted more closely.

The seedlings are transplanted in the previously made pits with fertilizer pits should be made in the evening . The seedling should be regularly watered for 3-4 days and twice, in the morning and evening.

Cultural practices

Loosening the soils : The space between the lines may be hoed 8-10 days after transplantation of the seedling to loosen the soil loose. Simultaneously, weeds should also be uprooted at this time.

Application of fertilizers: The first split of urea and muriate of potash should be applied 15 cm. away from the base when the seedlings are at least 15-20 days old. The fertilizers should be well mixed with the soil. In a similar way, the second split of urea and muriate of potash should be applied 20-25 days after the application of the first split. The third split of urea and muriate of potash should be applied 25-30 days after the application of the second split.

Irrigation : The irrigation need for is very high for cultivation of cabbage. The cabbage field should be irrigated at least once a week. After every irrigation, the top curst of soils should be broken or pulverized through spading at “joo” condition .

Control of insect pests: The cabbage fields are usually attacked by aphids, beetles, cut worms and butterflies. The insects may be controlled by a light-trap or by getting rid after clusters of eggs laid on the leaves of the plant by hand picking.

Page 58: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Vegetables 53

Harvesting of Cabbage: The cabbage may be harvested 3-4 month after transplanting of seedlings. Cabbage should be harvested when its head becomes tight, compact and heavy. Excessively hard cabbage heads frequently gets cracked. So cabbage should be harvested before it becomes very hard.

Yield of Cabbage : The normal yield of cabbage per hectare is 30-40 tons and 120-160 kg per decimal of land.

Kachu or Aroid: Aroid is common and inexpensive a vegetable in Bangladesh. Every part of aroid plant may be used as vegetable. Aroid is also an important vegetable in respect of its high nutrient value. No especial is care required for cultivation of aroid. However, its yield is very high. The characteristic importance of aroid is that when there is no other vegetable available at the end of the rainy season, it can meet the vegetable need.

Varieties of Aroid

There are many varieties of aroid crops in Bangladesh . Among these varieties are Mukhi Kachu, Panchamukhi Kachu, Pani Kachu, Man Kachu, Dudh Kachu, ol Kachu etc. English names should be provided if possible. The cultivation method of Mukhi Kachu is described below:

Selection of land

The most suitable land goes growing arrived is where excess rain water does not collect.

Preparation of Land

The land should be prepared by ploughing and cross ploughing followed by laddering and the soil should be of fine tilth. The land should also be levelled. Drainage channels should be made around the plot so that excess rain water may go out of the field.

Application of Fertilizers

The Quantity of fertilizers needed for Mukhi Kachu production are as below.

Fig : 15 Mukhi Kachu

Page 59: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

54 Agricultural Education

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

(per hectare) Quantity of the fertilizer

(per Decimal) Rotten cowdung 10 tons 40 kg Urea 150 kg 600 gm Triple super phosphate 125 kg 500 gm Muriate of potash 175 kg 700 gm

The cowdung and triple super phosphate fertilizers should be applied at the time of land preparation and should be well mixed with the soil. The urea and muriate of potash may be applied in two equal splits as foliar application. The first split should be applied 30 days after germination of the seeds. The second split should be applied two months after the application of the first split and the fertilizes should be well mixed with the soils along the lines. Seed Rate The corm and the mukhi are used as the seeds for Mukhi Kachu cultivation. However corm is better as a seed for Mukhi Kachu. The seed rate per decimal of land is 5-6 kg. The seed rate depends on the size of the corm and the planting distance. Planting Seed The most suitable time of planting Mukhi Kachu is Chaitra and Baishakh. The land should be prepared through ploughing and fertilizer should be applied at the time of land preparation. Furrows are made in the land by a plough at a distance of 60 cm. The corms are planted in this furrows at a distance of 20 cm and at a depth of 5 cm. It is better to plant slightly germinated corms. After planting the corms of the Mukhi Kachu, the whole lines should be covered with straw .At this moisture content is conserved and weeds are controlled. If there is enough moisture, the germination takes place within 15-20 days. Maintenance Process Control of weeds : Weeds in Mukhi Kachu plots may be removed by spading well in between the spaces. Earthing up : Earthing up should be done when the kachu plants attains a height of 30-45cm. The soil taken from the spaces be added to the base of the kachu plant so that the lines of kachu plants look like ridges and inter row space seems to be a furrow.

Page 60: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Vegetables 55

Drainage of water : Mukhi Kachu cannot withstand water logging. So excess water should be drained out by channels between two rows.

Harvesting of Crops : The best time for harvesting is the end of rainy season when the plants start dying. Mukhi Kachu should be harvested when all the plants die after maturity. Normally, early crop is harvested in the months of Sraban and Bhadra. The late crop may be harvested in the months of Kartik and Agrahayon. The early harvested crop cannot be stored. If the late crops are well dried it can be stored for 4-6 months.

Yield of Mukhi Kachu

When it is cultivated with necessary fertilizers, the production may be as high as 85-100kg per decimal of land.

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ)

1. Which type of vegetable is shil bilati?

a. Kanchu b. Brinjal

c. Potato d. Radish

2. Potato seeds-

i. can be sown from the mid-bhadra to the ashwin.

ii. appropriate time for sowing is mid-ashwin to mid-agrahyan.

iii. must be covered by a wet canvas for 48 hours under a shade before sowing.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. i & iii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

Answer question nos. 3 & 4 on the basis of table given below:

Page 61: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

56 Agricultural Education

Name of Fertilizer Quantity per decimal (40 sq m) Cow dung 40 kg Urea 800 kg TSP 600 kg MP 800 kg

3. Azahar applied in two installments- i. Urea ii. TSP iii. MP Which one of the following is correct? a. i & ii b. ii & iii c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii 4. How much MP fertilizer Azahar will apply to a plot of land of size 40 m × 15 m? a. 6 kg b. 8 kg c. 10 kg d. 12 kg Creative Questions (CQ) Sulaiman of Rasulpur village went to agriculture officer to get some advice for cultivation of cauliflower. He learnt from him about the selection of land, suitable varieties, process of preparation of land and application of fertilizers as per following table. Then he selected a land of size 80 m × 30 m. Name of Fertilizer well rotten Quantity per decimal (40 sq m) Cow dung 100 kg Urea 1 kg TSP 600 gm MP 700 gm Oil Cake 2 kg

Table : Quantity of fertilizer applicable in the land for cauliflower. a. Write down the name of an early variety of cauliflower. b. What type of land did Sulaiman select for cauliflower cultivation and why? c. Make a table maintaining the application of quantity of fertilizer in the selected

land of Sulaiman. d. Evaluate the importance of cultivation of vegetables in the improved method.

Page 62: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 6

Cultivation of Flowers

Flower cultivation in Bangladesh is very limited. Amateur people cultivate flowers in tub or household premises to a limited extent. Recently cultivation of flowers likes tube rose, rose, gladiolous and up have been started commercially. Varities of Jasmine, gabnharaj, aporajita, shefali, chandramallka (chrysanthemum), etc. flowers grow well in Bangladesh. It is possible to make a lot of profits by cultivating these flowers commercially.

Rose

Rose is known as the queen of all flowers. The charming colour and fragrance of the rose easily attract the human heart. Rose is thus loved by all over the world. The Cultivation of rose is also gradually increasing in Bangladesh. Besides providing cultivation of rose is contributing to the economic development of the country.

Varieties

There are enormous varities of rose throughout the world . The improved varieties of rose, now cultivated, have been developed through hybridization of mainly two varieties of rose. Some varieties have large plants. some are bushy while some are vines .According to the varietal characters, the colours of the rose may be pink, yellow, orange, red, white, and of mixed colours. Queen Elizabeth (Rose), Black prince (Black), Rishi Bankim (red), Cynderella (White) Alexander (orange), Ikature ( bicolour mixed) are some of the most the beautiful varieties of roses.

Propagation

Depending on the condition, the roses may be propagated though stem cutting, simple layering, eye budding and grafting methods. But for development of new varieties, seedlings are produced from rose seeds.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-8

Fig : 17 Rose

Fig : 16 Rose

Page 63: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

58 Agricultural Education

Selection of land

Fertile loamy soils, having enough organic matter with acidic soil reaction should be selected for cultivation of roses. Open place with no shade, free from water- logging and high land is best for rose cultivation.

Preparation of land

The selected land should be prepared by, ploughing 4-5 time and cross ploughing follower by laddering. The soil should be made loose and the land should be levelled. The land should also be cleared of weeds. Then the beds will hare be prepared in plot measuring 3 meter x 1 meter in length and width by digging the soil deeply. The surface of the rose bed will have to be raised by five cm above the original ground level. After preparation of the land, pits measuring 60 cm. length, 60 cm width and 45 cm depth should be made at certain distance. The spacing of the pits prepared for rose plantation will be 60-90 cm for large plants ,30-45 cm for small plants and 2-2.5 meters for vines. The upper soil and the lower soil of the pits should be kept separately. The pits should be prepared 15 days before planting rose grafts. The germs and insect pests will be destroyed under direct sunshine during this period.

Application of Fertilizers

The following fertilizers are for mixing with the upper soil of the pit and should be put into the lower part of the pit.

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

Well rotten cowdung 5 kg

Urea 200 gm

Tripple super phosphate 100 gm

Muriate of potash 50 gm

Then about five kg of well rotten cowdung, five kg leaf mold compost and 500 grams of wood ash should be well mixed with the lower part soil and this soil fertilizer mixture should be spread on the part of the pit. Then the whole pit should be left for 15-20 days in this condition so that the fertilizer materials are fully decomposed and get well mixed and thus will be most suitable for rose planting. Drains should be made on the land in a planned way so that excess water can not stand anywhere in the plot. After planting rose seedling, the following fertilizer should be applied in the methods described below :

Page 64: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Flowers 59

Time of Fertilizer

Application

Name of the fertilizer

Quantity of the fertilizer (per Plant)

Application Method

Time for emergence of bud

from the stem

Urea Muriate of potash

5gm 5gm

The fertilizer to be mixed with the soil 10

cm away from the base of the plant

Two months after the first application

of the fertilizers

Urea Muriate of potash

Oil cake cowdung

Well rotten cowdung

5 gm 5gm 1kg 5 kg 2kg

Do

Every year in the months of Aswin and Kartik after

pruning of the plant

Leaf mold compost

Oil cake Urea

Muriate of potash Triple super phosphate

2 kg 200 gm 100 gm 10 gm 10 gm 25 gm

Do

Planting seedling or Grafts

The month of Aswin is the optimum time for planting rose seedlings or grafts. However, this process may continue up to the month of Poush. But in this case the seedling or graft should be planted in a small pit made in the center of the original pit. Firstly, the seedling or the graft should be taken from a poly bag or tub or pot. The weak branches, diseased roots, etc. should be pruned off. After planting, the base of the seedling or graft should be compacted by hard pressure so that the base become strong. A strong stick should be placed along the rose plant which should be tied up with the stick in order to provide support. Light irrigation should be given after planting. It is better to arrange a shade for the newly planted seedling for 2-3 days.

Maintenance Process/Protection of Plant Controlling weeds : Weeds are found to grow fast in the rose beds. As soon as weeds are seen on the beds these should be cleaned.

Page 65: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

60 Agricultural Education

Applying irrigation water : After testing the soil moisture, the irrigation of water should be started in such a way so that there is no deficit of soil moisture . Giving frequent irrigation but in small amount during the initiation of flower budding makes the flower bigger in size.

Draining excess water : There should not be any water logging in the rose beds. Rose plants cannot tolerate water logging. So, outlets should be made in the plots at the beginning of the rainy season, to allow excess rain water can get out of the plot.

Pruning Branches :

More flowers of rose are produced from new shoots. The old and diseased branches and twigs are required to be regularly pruned. Branches of rose plants if pruned every year, helps the plant to attain a beautiful and strong shape and produce big flowers. Pruning should be done in the months of Aswin and Kartik. Fertilizers should be applied at the base of the plant. Six to eight weeks after, new shoots begin to grow and large sized flowers are produced.

Pruning of Buds :

Sometimes, after pruning of a rose plant, a large number of flowering buds, twigs emerge from the main stem at a time. If all these buds are allowed to bloom, flower do not become big. Thus the side buds are required to be pruned keeping main buds intact by a sharp knife. At the end of the main flowering season additional flowers may also be produced if the plant is again pruned to a depth of 15 cm from the apex.

Insect Pests :

Rose plants are usually infested by various kind pests, but the red scale and beetles are the most dangerous among them.

Red Scale Insect

Red scale insects have the appearance of dead skin. It's attack is more frequent in the summer and rainy season. The red scale sucks the plant sap from the bark. As a result spots are formed on the bark. If remedial measures are not taken the rose plant may die. If the number of plant are few the red scale insect may be removed simply by brushing the infested place with a tooth brush. The insect may also be controlled be applying marathon or diazion .

Fig : 18 Red scale insect

Page 66: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Flowers 61

Beetles

Beetles insects are found to attack rose plants at the end of winter season. The beetles eat the young green leaves and petals of the flowers by boring into the plant. It usually attacks at night .

This may be controlled by light-trap method. If the number of rose plants are few beetles may be destroyed locating them with the help of a torch light. Application of insecticides, namely malathion or dimecron- 100 at an interval of two weeks may control the insects effectively.

Diseases and prevention

Rose plants are found to be attacked by a number of diseases. However, black spot, die back and powdery mildew diseases are the most dangerous among them.

Black spot Disease : Deep black spots are formed on the old leaves of plant when they are attacked by black spot disease. The black spot disease become prominent during the period of Chaitra to Kartik. Black spot disease may be controlled by applying Cupravit or Copper Oxychloride at right doses. The diseases infested leaves should be pruned and fully burned.

Die back disease : Sympotms of die back disease attack may be seen on the prune cuts of the branches. The rose plant dies from the upper part of the branches when attacked by die back disease. For controlling the disease, the pruning knife or pruning scissors should be disinfested by antiseptic lotions before pruning . The portions should be washed by rectified spirit.

Powdery mildew disease : powdery mildew is a fungal disease . The disease rapidly spreads during foggy weather in the winter season. As a symptom, whitish powders are found on the surface of the leaves when attacked by this disease. Ten grams of sulphur or thiovit should be diluted in seven litres of water and the solution should be sprayed on rose plant once a week, to control the disease.

Fig : 19 Beetle insect

Page 67: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

62 Agricultural Education

Harvesting of Flowers The rose flower should be harvested from the plant before these fully bloom. The flowers should be cut with the help of a sharp scissor keeping a stalk measuring 2o cm in length. If the stalk of the flowers after harvest are dipped in clear water and kept in a cool place, the condition of flowers remain fresh.

Frequent water spray to the flowers is good. Five thousand to seven thousand flowers may be harvested from one decimal of rose garden and 1250000 flowers may be harvested from per hectare of land.

Tube Rose

Tube rose is a perennial sweet flavored flower. The flavour of this flower spreads at night and so this flower is known as Rajanigandha, (Fragrance of the night) Tube rose is a very popular and favorite flower in Bangladesh . The colour of the flower is white. Tube rose flowers may be single layered or double layered . The single layered tube rose is more flavoured. It use for decorations in functions and festivals. When kept in a flower vase along with long stalk, the flowers remain fresh for several days spreading sweet fragrance.

Selection of Land

The most suitable land for tube rose cultivation is where there is plenty of sunshine and open air. Tube roses grow well in loam and sandy loam soils. This plant can never withstand water logging. So, the land should be well drained.

Preparation of Land

The land where tube rose is to be cultivated should be well to make the soil loose. The fertilizers recommended below should be applied to the soil per decimal of land.

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

Well rotten cowdung 100 kg

Urea 750 gm

Tripple super phosphate or

Muriate of potash

2kg

1.5 kg

Bone meal 1.5kg

Fig : 20 Tube rose

Page 68: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Flowers 63

All the fertilizers should be thoroughly mixed with the soil at the time of land preparation and lest in such a condition should be left for two weeks.

Planting Seedlings

Beds are to be prepared for planting tube rose seedling. The planting should be done keeping 30 cm distance. The distance of plant to plant within a line will be 15 cm. The rhizomes or corms of tube rose (the base of the tube rose plant) should be planted in a pit 4-5cm deep. The growth of tube rose is high during the rainy season. However, if irrigating water is available and proper practices are ensured it may be cultivated throughout the year. For breaking dormancy the corms may be soaked in a 4% Solution of thio-urea for 30 minutes . This solution makes the corms more vigorous.

Cultural Practices

Controlling weeds : Weeds should not be allowed to grow in tube rose gardens. Weeds should be uprooted and cleaned immediately.

Applying irrigation water : Necessary arrangements should be made for regular irrigation to the tube rose beds. During the drought season the beds should be irrigated at least once a week.

Draining excess water : The excess water, if accumulated in the tube rose plots due to over irrigation or rainfall, It should be removed from the beds. Small canals should be prepared for this purpose.

Foliar application of fertilizers : About 500 grams of urea per decimal of land may be added as foliar application, one and half month after planting the corms of tube rose. If symptoms like dropping of flowers and dullness of colour of the flowers are seen, triple super phosphate and muriate of potash may be applied respectively.

Harvesting of flowers

Flowering in tube rose starts 3-4 months after planting the corms. The stalk of the flower is usually 15 cm tall and the length of inflorescence along the stalk is 25-40 cm. The flowers grow in tube like clusters. The tube rose sticks are harvested before blooming of the flower buds, by with the help of a sharp knife. The flowers remain in vigorous condition for several days if the base of the flower sticks are kept in water . Finally, tube rose flowers along with the long sticks should be packed in black polyethylene paper and sent to the market.

Page 69: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

64 Agricultural Education

Rangan

Rangan is one of the important bushy and showy plants. These clustered flowers are seen at the apex of the shoots. The colours of the flowers may be red, rose, yellow, etc. This flower blooms throughout the year. The flowers start bloom from the end of spring and continue upto Autumn. The name of a popular variety of Rangan is coxinia . The colour of the coxinia variety is red.

Land preparation and Planting of Grafts

The rangan plants are usually propagated by stem cutting and guti layers. Loamy soils of high lands should be selected for planting rangan grafts. The land must be well drained and should be situated under open air and sun shine. The rangan plants are usually grown in gaps of other showy plants for more beautification of the garden. The rangan should be planted in pits. The size of the pit will be 50 cm. in lenght, 50 cm in width and 50 cm in depth. The pit should be dried under direct sunshine for 115 days. The following recommended fertilizers should be applied in rangan plant pits:

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

Well rotten cowdung 5 kg

Urea 200 gm

Tripple super phosphate 200gm

Muriate of potash 50gm

The above fertilizers should be well mixed with the upper soil of the pit and to be given in the pit. About five kg well rotten cowdung should be mixed with the lower soil of the pit and should be given on the surface of the pit. The pit should be left for about 15 days for proper decomposition and mixing of the fertilizer.

Fig : 21 Rangan

Page 70: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Flowers 65

The rangan grafts or layers should be planted in a small hole made at the center of the pit after about 15 days of fertilizer application. The grafts should be planted to such a depth of soil as it was previously in the pot or seed bed. The graft should be bound to a strong stick placed along its stem so that the wind cannot move it. The base of the plant should be monitored after applying irrigation water. Cultural Practices Control of Weeds : Growth of weeds should not be allowed to grow in the fields of rangan plants. Weeds should be uprooted as soon as they are seen in the field through nirani. Arrangement should be made for irrigation and necessary care must be taken so that excess water can not stand at the base of rangan plant. Small drainage canals should be prepared to remove excess rain water. Pruning : Pruning is essential for keeping rangan plant small in size.Pruning enhances new shoot growth and produces large sized flower inflorescence. The fertilizers given below are to be applied after every pruning per plant.

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer Well rotten cowdung 5 kg

Urea 200 gm Triple super phosphate 200gm

Muriate of potash 50gm Harvesting Flower Rangan flowers are usually used while preparing bouquets. The flowers should be harvested when it is at the budding stage. Flower rapidly drop if harvested at the full blooming stage. Marigold

Marigold is also a very popular flower, The cultivation of marigold is very simpie. This plant withstands some unfavorable condition also. This flower can be cultivated with simple cultural practices. So, these can be cultivated in garden, park, pot and baleongh of the house. This flower is

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-9

Fig : 22

Page 71: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

66 Agricultural Education

extensively used in functions, festivals, house decoration, preparing garlands, etc. Marigolds also have medicinal value. When the sap of this marigold flower is applied over a wound, it is heal up very rapidly.

Varieties

Mainly there are two types of marigold. There are African marigold and French marigold. African marigold plants are straight and long. It can attain a height of30100 cm accordingto different varieties. Flowers are fairlylarge and of varieties colours like orange, yellow and maroon. French Marigold flower plants are shorter in size and it is bushy . It may attain a heights of 15-30 cm according to varieties andcharacters. Flowers are smaller in size but enormous in number . The colour of the flowers is mainly redish but some varieties have yellow colour also.

Preparing Seedling

Marigold seedlings may be produced from seeds and stem cutting. Marigold seedling may be produced by thinly sowing seeds in seed bed in the months of Aswin and Kartik. The seed bed of marigold may be prepared like vegetable seed production. The stem of marigold is to be cut into Pieces at a length of 5-10 cm for preparing seedling. Before this, seed bed should be made under shade and prepared by mixing three parts of sand, one part of loam soil and one part leaf mold compost. The stem cutting should have at least one node under the soil of the seed bed. If irrigated appropriately, the seedling with roots, leaves and twigs will be produced within a short period of time.

Preparation of land

The land for growing marigold should be prepared by 4-5 times ploughing or spading, cross ploughing and alternate laddering. The soil should be given loose structure and fine tilth .High land with loamy texture is most suitable for cultivation of marigold flowers. The following recommended fertilizers should be applied in the land of marigold flowers per decimal of land.

Page 72: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Flowers 67

Name of the Fertilizer Quantity of the fertilizer

Well rotten cowdung 200 kg

Urea 1 kg

Tripple super phosphate bone-meal 500 gm

Muriate of potash 1kg

All the fertilizers mentioned above should be thoroughly mixed with the soil at the time of land preparation.

Planting of Seedling

The most suitable time of planting the marigold seedling is from Bhadra to Kartik. The seedlings are to be planted in rows. The distance between rows is 50-60 cm and distance from plant to plant is 30-40 cm. Two seedlings may be planted in a medium sized tub. Irrigation should be given 2-3 days after planting the seedlings, once in the evening every day.

Cutural practices

Irrigation : Necessary irrigation should be provided to marigold plants.

Control of weeds : Weeds grown in the bed of marigold should be cleaned.

Control of insect pests : The attack of pests in marigold plant is normally lower then others. The attack by aphids may be slightly higher. These insect pests may be controlled by applying insecticide, namely malathion.

Giving supporting sticks : When the marigold plant grows, larger supporting sticks should be given.

Pruning : The marigold plant should be duly pruned by breaking the elongated shoots to give it a beautiful bushy shape. If large number of flowering buds emerge from a shoot, these should be pruned keeping only one or two good flowering buds. This will help to produce bigger size flowers.

Page 73: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

68 Agricultural Education

Harvesting of Flowers Marigold flowers should be harvested along with the stalk and with the help of a scissor. The harvested flowers should be wrapped by black polythylene sheet after giving a spray of clear water and then may be sent to the market. The marigold flowers may be marketed by making garlands and bouquets.

Practical

1. Title of the Experiment : Preparing Contact Grafts of Rose Plants

Materials

1. A one year old good quality rose plant grown in a tub.

2. A wild rose plant (mother plant or scion).

3. Good quality rose plant (stock)

4. One sharp grafting knife.

5. Polythylene tape.

Work Process

1. Collect a one year old improved variety rose plant (stock plant) grown in a tub.

2. Cut the bark of the stem about 25 cm above the base measuring about four cm in length by the sharp knife. The cut should cover one third of diameter of the stem including the bark.

3. Select a wild rose plant branch as mother scion material of the same age and same diameter.

4. Remove one third portion of bark and soft materials as done previously from the stalk plant.

5. Now bind the cut portions of the stock plant and the scion material together by a polyethylene tape so that no vacuum remains within the joint.

Page 74: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Flowers 69

6. Place the tub on an elevated place.

7. The stock and the scion will be joined after about three months.

8. Now gradually cut the scion branch below the joint in three times and finally detach it from the contacted plant through cutting it in several steps.

9. Keep the separated graft in a cool shady place.

10. Now cut the apex shoot of the graft and keep it in the nursery.

11. Plant this contact graft made of an imporved variety with a wild variety in the selected and prepared place after four weeks of the cutting.

12. Practice for preparing more contact grafts.

2. Title of the Experiment: Preparing Seed Bed for Tube Rose Seedling

Materials

1. A land measuring three meters in length and one meter in width

1. Tubers or corms of tube rose plant

2. Pieces of bricks

3. Soil and sand

4. Cowdung and leaf mold compost

5. Tape for measuring land

6. Ropes and sticks or poles

Work process

1. Select a high land in an open air under sunshine, having loamy texture. The land will be such that flood water can not reach it and excess rain water do not accumulate.

2. Measure a piece of land of three meters length and one meter width by a measuring tape.

Page 75: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

70 Agricultural Education

3. Put up four poles at the four corners of the selected measured plot and fix the boundary with the thin rope or thread.

4. Clean the land, remove waste materials, weeds and other dirts. Spade the land and make the soil loose as far as posible.

5. Then prepare the seed bed making three separate players on the seleted land.

6. The first layer will be of four cm high. Prepare this layer by spreading pieces of bricks.

7. The second layer will also be of four cm high prepare this layer by mixing soil and sand in 50-50 proportions.

8. The third layer will also be of four cm high. Prepare a mixture with one third soil, one third well rotten cowdung and one third leaf mold compost and place this mixture uniformly.

9. Once the Seed bed for raising tube rose seedlings is prepared. Plant the tube rose corms or tubes in the bed according to the spacing given below.

Distance from line to line : 10cm.

Distance from tuber to tuber : 6 cm

Depth of planting tubers : 4 cm.

10. Irrigation water in the seed bed after planting the tubers . The tubers will greminate within a period 8-10 days . These seedling are suitable for planting in the filed when their age will about one month.

3. Title of Experiment : Preparing Guti layer of ( Rangan)

Materials 1. One disease free Rangan flower plant

2. Cowdung manure

3. Clay textured soil

4. Ropes or threads

5. Polythene tape

6. Grafting knife

7. Measuring tape

Page 76: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Flowers 71

Work Process

1. Select one disease free beautiful Rangan plant .

2. Select one branch of the plant which lies mostly parallel to the plant at the base. The age should be about one year and the diameter like a pencil.

3. Measure 50 cm from the apex to the base in length of the branch by a measuring tape.

4. Select one node below this 50 cm length and cut the bark of the branch covering a place of four cm by the sharp garting knife . Remove the bark.

5. Remove the slippery materials of the debarked wood surface and clean the cut place .

6. Now make a ball mixing three parts of the clay soil and one of the cowdung by hand.

7. Place the ball on the cut portion of the branch so that it covers three cm more at both the sides .Then give a light spray of water on the ball .

8. Now wrap the ball with the polythene piece measuring 20 cm length and breadth each side . Tightly bind the top and bottom of the polythene with rope .

9. Make a small hole in the polythene to spray water on ball.

10. It may be seen after a period of 4-5 weeks that white roots are growing in the guti. but later the colour will be brownish or light brown . At this time, cut the guti layer and remove it from the mother plant .

11. Cut the guti layer at the lower end in several steps cutting only a little at a time. Care should be taken so that no creak occurs in the stem at time of cutting the layer.

12. After detaching the guti layer, remove the excess leaves and twigs of the branch . Remove slowly the polythene cover above the guti and place the guti in a seed bed or a tub.

13. Irrigate the guti layer lightly .

14. The guti layer will be suitable for planting after preserving it 4 – 5 weeks .

Page 77: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

72 Agricultural Education

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ) 1. To stop dropping of tube rose (Rajanigandha) flower before it blooms it is essential to

apply-

a. Muriate of potash b. Well rotten cow-dung

c. TSP d. Urea

2. To which flower species does coxinia come from?

a. Rose b. Gandharaj

c. Tube Rose d. Rangan.

3. In which solution tubers or corn of tube rose are to be soaked for breaking of germination dormancy?

i. Theo urea solution

ii. Urea solution

iii. TSP solution

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

Fig : 23 Guti Layering of rangan

Page 78: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Flowers 73

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 4, 5 & 6.

In the month of kartik Suman Khan planted marigold flower in rows in a south facing land. He planted seedlings of marigold at a distance of 30 centimeters between rows and 20 centimeters from plant to plant. Though he applied regular irrigation and cultural practices he did not get expected harvest. Insects also attacked to a good number of plants.

4. Which insect attacks more on marigold flower?

a. Red scale b. Beetles

c. Die back d. Aphids

5. When planting the marigold seedling what should be the distance from plant to plant?

a. 30-40 cm. b. 45-55 cm.

c. 50-60 cm. d. 55-65 cm.

6. Suman Khan did not get expected harvest of marigold flower, because-

i. The month of Kartik is not a suitable time for marigold plantation.

ii. The distance between rows was not on right order.

iii. Insects attacked the flower plants.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-10

Page 79: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

74 Agricultural Education

Creative Questions (CQ) 1. Ripon Mia of Jessore underwent training on the cultivation of flower from the youth

training centre and started cultivation of rose on 4 (four) decimal of fertile loamy soils. Ripon Mia applied modern technology of cultivation and flowers bigger in size were produced in his garden. He produced 6500 flowers per decimal and sold each flower at the rate of taka three. Seeing such a grand success of Ripon Mia a large number of unemployed youths were inspired for rose cultivation.

a. Write down the name of a two colour species of rose.

b. Explain the process of irrigation to the rose plants.

c. What were the factors on which Ripon Mia gave proper attention in producing large flowers in the garden?

d. Evaluate Ripon Mia’s success in the rose cultivation and the inspiration to others for rose cultivation.

Page 80: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Chapter Two Section 1

Rearing of Improved Variety of Cows

There are about 2.287 crore of cows in Bangladesh. These are indigenous and less productive. In the past the country had less population. There were plenty of pasture lands. It was possible to meet the demand of milk and beef by rearing cattle of indigenous breeds in traditional method. At present it has become difficult to meet the demand of milk and beef for the rapidly growing population. For this reason, improved breeds of cattle has been evolved through hybridization. Improved hybrid cow yields 10-15 litres of milk a day. A hybrid cow can yield 25 liters of milk a day if balanced food is provided and cows are reared hygienically. As a result, interest among the people foe rearing cows of improved breed is increasing day by day. In the villages and even in the city suburb, Many people rear cows of improved breed.

Fig : 24 Improve breed of Cow (shahiwal)

Page 81: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

76 Agricultural Education

Improved breed of cow such as Holstein, Jersy, Ireshire, Gurarcy, and Brown Swiss are available in Europe, America and Australia. They are famous for milk production. Red Sindhi, Shahuwal of Pakistan, and Hariana of India are improved breeds of milk producing cow. The production capacity of indigenous (local) cows increases if these are inseminated with the semen of the bull of improved breed artificially. The per day milk production of hybrid breed increases upto 15-16 litres.

Name of the breed of Cow Place Of Origin Daily milk production

Holstein Holland 25-30

Jersy British Channel 15-20

Ireshire Scotland 15-20

Brown Swiss Switzerland 20-22

Gurarcy English Channel 20-25

Red Sindhi Pakistan 10-12

Shahiwal Pakistan 12-15

Hariana India 6-8

Living Place

For proper care and management of cow, first of all a good living place is requires for both family and commercial farming. The fundamental factors regarding the living place of cows are imputation.1. The living place should be dry and elevated.

2. The soil should be able to absorb water thinly.

3. It should hare access to sunlight and free air.

4. The shed must be well built.

5. The shed must be protective against wild animal, storm and rain.

6. It should have a good drainage facility

The living place for commercial farming should have some special arrangements :

Page 82: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Improved Variety of Cows 77

Fig : 25 Living place of cow

Resting Place : Each cow needs about 5.4 square meter living place. It is better to spread sand, saw dust and straw on the floor of the resting place for proper nest. Feeding Place : For each cow nine square meter space is necessary. In this space cows are fed. Each cow needs 75 cm feeding space. It is better of have a concrete floor for this area.

Milking Place : It is the place where cows are milked. Scientific rearing arrangement should be made for cows after making living place.

Rearing Arrangement

Proper hygiene, Appropriate breeding, balanced food, preventive measures are the preconditions of rearing cows of improved breed. Every day cows are to be bathed. Before milking the under should be cleaned and the hands of the milking man should be washed with potassium mixed water. The calf is to be fed as per requirement and the rest of the milk should be milked. The interim period between two calfing should not be more than one year. As a result the cow will remain milkless for a long time and the inter time for two calfing will be longer. If after 60-90 days of delivery the cow does not come into heat, the doctors should be consulted. Or the milk of production will be decreased after delivery and the cow will be dried up.

Page 83: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

78 Agricultural Education

Due attention should be paid during delivery of cow. Inspite of proper care the deficiency of food or malnutrition can make the cow weak. As a result milk production will be decreased and the cow will be sick and consequently the cow will lose its fertility. For this reason , in the management of cow the most important factor is to provide balanced food. Cattle Food The cow is a machine for milk production. Food is the raw material for this machine. The cow is to be fed balanced food in order to keep the milk production in an increasing trend. On the basis of nature and quality, the food can be divided into two groups, such as (i) fibrous and (ii) concentrate food. Green grass, straw, dry grass, millet, maize, preserved green grass and silage are fibrous food. Mustard, oil cake, rice bran, wheat barn, pulse and rice grain, etc. are concentrate food.

Sl no Ingredients of Food Daily Requirement 1. Dry straw 3-4kg 2. Fresh green grass 12-15kg 3. Concentrate food preparation

a. Wheat bran b. Rice bran c. Crushed Kheshari d. Mustard oil cake

1.5 kg 2.0 kg 0.8 kg 0.5 kg

4. Soil and mineral mixture 100 kg Or

Sl no Ingredients of Food Daily Requirement

1. Dry straw 3-4kg

2. Fresh green grass 12-15kg

3. Concentrate food preparation

a. Wheat bran

b. Rice bran

c. Crushed Kheshari

d. Mustard oil cake

e. Oil cake/ til/ tishi

f. Molasses

1.5 kg

500 gm

750 gm

250 gm

250gm

250-300 gm

4. Salt 50 gm

Page 84: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Improved Variety of Cows 79

In the rural areas of our country the cattle are fed with straw, grasses and some herbs. Some people fed them rice bran, gruel, husk, oil, cakes etc. Dry Straw should be cut into pieces and mixed with gruel oil cake and salt to fed the cattle. Each cow should be given 300 gm molasses with straw everyday. Each cow should be given six kg of green grass for each 100 of body weight. It is essential to provide sufficient amount of pure water everyday.

Green grass for Cattle

Green grass is one of the major components of balanced food. There is a saying that if you feed green grass to the cow, you will get milk throughout the whole year. Green grass increases milk production, body growth and energy for work. It also makes skin smooth and cow gives birth to a healthy calf and no disease can occur. Diseases due to malnutrition never occur. Green grass contains sufficient amount of vitamins which increase fertility of the cow and the calf. Due to shortage of green grass, fertility of the heifer calf is delayed. Due to insufficient green grass, parturition become difficult and sometimes ovary becomes abnormal. There are different types of green grass in our country as durba, baksha, bhadail, dhaicnha, kella, bileini, binya, kausha, dalkalmi, maloncha,arail,sechi,water hyacinth, etc. Besides, the leaves of many trees are used and cattle food instend of green grass. Amongst these tree jack fruit doiya, rain tree are worth mentioning. Due to shortage of pasture land, there is scarcity of green grass in our country. So, improved types of grass should be cultivated.

Improved Type of Grass

There are nurseries of improved type of grass at the thana veterinary dispensaries and in the government dairy farms. Grass seeds, seedlings and cuttings are distributed among the farmers from those centers. These can be grown in the fallow land nearby houses, on the bank of tanks, by the idea of the rail line and road and on the ails of land near home stead on the solpe of hill. The improved type of grasses are napier, para, guinea, sendida, pengula, ipil, barseam, oats, maize, cowpea losern or alfa etc.

Napier

Napier is a high yielding permanent type of grass. All over Bangladesh this grass can be grown. Usually, this grass is cultivated through cutting roots and stolen. They should have at least three nodes in eacht stock.

Page 85: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

80 Agricultural Education

Methods of Transplanting cutting

1. At first the land should be ploughed finely. Then three cuttings should be planted together in such a way so that (i) one mode is placed under ground; (ii) the second node should be paralled to the soil and (iii) the third node is placed above the soil. Cutting should be placed at the angle of 45º - 60º with soil. The process will help the easy spread of roots, from the nodes Six to seven cuttings can be obtained from one branch of napier. There is a possibility of rottening of the cuttings due to excess rainfall.

2. It is easy to multiply napier through basal stem. Usually land is to be prepared during the month of Baishakh after heavy shower. After the preparation of land the seedlings are transplanted. One big sapling can be divided into four or five. The seedlings are to be transplanted in lines after trimming the top. It is better to put some cowdung or guan around each seedling. Napier can be transplanted from end of Baishakh to Bhadra. But earlier plantation yields better result. Napier grass can be harvested after 45 – 60 days of transplantation. If the grass is planted after due preparation of land, grass can be harvested after 90 days.

Napier grass can be planted in the soppy land, by the side of the road on the bank of the pond, by the side of the embankment and on the slope of the hill. In this case transplantation method is different. Small holes are to be made and around the seeding some cowdung is to be placed, The plantation is to be done in regular lines. As a result when there is rain, loose soild will be deposted in second line and tere will be less possibility of breaking the lines.

Napier grass can be harvested after 3-4 weeks of each harvest. Grasses are to be harvested 7-10 cm about the ground level. Otherwise there will be some damage to the grass stock. Napier grass once transplanted can be retained for 3-4 years. After that reactivation is necessary in order to stop the decrease of production. With proper cultivation 50 tones of napier grass can be obtained from one acre of land.

Fig : 26 Napier Grass

Page 86: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Improved Variety of Cows 81

Para Para is an aquatic grass. Sometimes it is also called buffalo grass. This grass is

grown well in dumpy land. Para grows in all kinds of lands viz high, low slopy water stagnant and saline soil. The weather of Bangladesh is congenial for para grass production. By the side of bush, in between plants slopy land, side of the roads and fallow lands are suitable for para grass cultivation. The land needs 2-3 ploughing and laddering. Before ploughing sufficient amount of cowdung should be applied in the soil. Usually, Baishakh and Jaishtha are suitable for para

grass cultivation. Plants with roots or stems can be used as seed. The seedling of the grass can be planted in rows or haphazardly. The distance form one

row to another row is 60-90 cm and distance from seedling to seedling is 15-30 cm. The good production the soil must be kept moist. Eight to ten cuttings may be done in a year. One hundred tons of grass can be produced from one hectare of land. This grass can be preserved after drying as silage. The cattle can be grazed in the field also. The protein content of para grass in 6.9 per cent.

Guinea Grass

Guinea grass is highly productive and permanent. It grows well in Bangladesh during monsoon. This grass can be produce in shady places like mango, Jackfruit, coconut and betel-nut gardens. Guinea grass can be produced both from seeds and cuttings. It is multiplied from cuttings.

Before cultivation, land should be cultivation and made free of weeds. Ones the seedling are sprouted weeds can not do any harm, if it cultivated through land stem, weeds cannot do any harm.

The seedlings should be keeps to protect from strong sun light. If the grasses are planted during this time they remain production for few years. From a stem stock 4-5 seedlings can be obtained. If the Seedling are uprooted with roots plants become stronger. The seedling should be transplanted as quickly as possible after uprooting.

Fig : 27 Para Grass

Fig : 28 Guinea Grass

Page 87: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

82 Agricultural Education

The line to line distance should be 90 cm and plant to plant distance 30 cm. Each seedling should be rooted at a depth of 7-10 cm. usually guinea grass remain productive from may to October and can be harvested in five weeks. Thirty tons of grass can be obtained each year from one acre of land is and fertilizers are applied.

German Grass

This grass grows in low land. The weather and soil of Bangladesh are very suitable for the cultivation of this grass. It grows in low land muddy soil, slope land and water logged land. Cultivation of this grass needs well preparation of soil. The cultivation of the grass are planted in muddy soil. Soil must be free from weeds. Before planting the grass the land should be ploughed well followed by laddering. During the month of Baishakh to Shraban this grass can

be planted. Seedling is best with roots and stem. Each cutting should have 2-3 nodes. It is better to plant the cutting in a slanting position. But cutting with node must be above water. Otherwise cutting will be rottener.

This grass can be planted both in line an haphazard manner. Distance between rows should be 80-90 cm. Clearing of weeds is easy if it is planted in rows. For better

production, sufficient cowdung and other fertilizer are needed. Substantially this grass grows very quickly. It is as long as para grass. Normally the grass becomes 150-180 cm long and the blade 30-50 cm long. Grass can be first harvested after 2-3 months of plantation. Yearly 8-10 harvests can be done. This is a very high quality grass for cattle. If there is arrangement for irrigation and application of balanced fertilizer per hectare yield may be 1200 quintal.

Maize

Maize is an excellent food for livestock and poultry. Maize is used as concentrate food. Maize plants are used as fodder. Maize can be cultivated twice a year. First cultivation can be done from mid Aswin to Agrahyan. And the second crop can be yielded from Falgoon to mid Chaitrys. High land is necessary for maize cultivation. Low land can also be used for the purpose. Our soil is very much congenial for maize cultivation pare.

Fig : 29 German

Fig : 30 Maize Plant

Page 88: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Improved Variety of Cows 83

Maize can be cultivated in two ways, viz (i) broadcasting and (ii) line sowing. In line sowing , line to line distance should be about 30 cm. Seeds should be planted at a distance of five cm and at a depth of 7-10 cm. Thirty five or forty kg of seeds are sown per hectare of land.

After rainfall or irrigation, seeds should be broadcast or planted. The maize is a rapidly growing fodder. Before the emergence of cobs, 18-20 tons of fodder can be obtained from one hectare of land. If improved cultural practices are followed and seeds of high yielding varieties are used, 50 tons of fodder may be obtained of one hectare of land. The maize plant become suitable for harvest for fodder at the height of one meter. If grains are needed, these should be collected when the colour of grains of yellow. After extracting grains cobs can be grinded and used as food. Then the maize seedling attain the height of 15-20 cm the field should be made weed free and proper spading must be done.

When the plants attain the height of 30-40 cm. alternate lines can be retained for grains. If this method is followed before the emergence of cobs, 18-30 tons of fodder can be obtained from per hectare of land. If maize is cultivated in proper time and in improved method, 50 tons of fodder can easily be obtained from one hectare of land.

Maize is a nutritious and high quality cattle food. This can be fed in green condition and it can also be preserved as silage. The maize seeds can be preserved in polythene bags and also in earthen pot mixed with fine ash. Maize contains 6.74% protein 0.52% calcium, 0.28% phosphorus and 0.34% potassium. Maize is cultivated all over the world.

Cowpea

Cowpea is a nutritious and high yielding cattle fodder .The climate of Bangladesh is very suitable for cowpea production. As fodder cowpea can be cultivated 2-3 times a year, Cowpea is cultivated in early winter in seed production. If there is less rainfall cowpea can be cultivated in sloppy and high land. Cowpea cultivation needs 4-5 sloughing followed by 2-3 laddering. For proper cultivation land must be weed free. Proper maturing is to be done. If the land is fertile enough, crop can be cultivated without maturing. Before sowing the seeds soil must be pulverized.

Rotten cow dung and waste materials from farms are used and high yield can be obtained.

Page 89: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

84 Agricultural Education

During the initial stage of land preparation, TSP may be applied and in the final stage of land preparation MP is to be used. The seed requirement per hectare of land is about 25 kg. Yield per hectare of land may be about 250 quintal. Cowpea and maize can be cultivated as mixed crop. Usually seeds are sown during the months of February and March. If cowpea and maize are grown as mixed crop, the maize seeds are to be placed in lines and cowpea seeds are to be broadcast. Mixed grass of cowpea and maize contains protein above 12%.

Cowpea can be cultivated both in broadcast and line methods. As fodder cowpea can be harvested within 45-50 days after sowing. Cowpea cultivation needs no irrigation. Cowpea cultivation needs no irrigation. Cowpea can be harvested every day as per requirement. During winter when napier grass remains in dormant condition, cowpea can be cultivated in napier field. Pods of cowpea can be harvested after 2-2.5 months of sowing. This can be used as country bean.

Ipil Ipil

Ipil-ipil is a leguminous plant. It’s pods contain very high percentage of protein. The leaves of Ipil –Ipil look like those of tamarind of krishnachura. This plant can be 30 cm in circumference and 5-10 meter in height. The saplings are available in nursery. The saplings can be planted around the house, on the bank of ponds, by the sides of roads and on the ails of crop field. Leaves are usually harvested before flowering and can be a good fodder. These can be dried up and mixed with concentrate food. In green condition this can be mixed with other grasses and straw. Animal should not be given ipil-ipil leaves by itself.

Ipil-Ipil leaves and some other green grass contain very high percentages of protein and vitamin “A”. For cultivation of these crops of 90 cm x 90 cm space should be cleaned and well spaded. This space needs five kg well rotten cow dung or compost. After 2-3 days of application of manure, this space should be kept weeds free. If there is shortage of moisture, irrigation should be given, When seedlings of this bed become 20-22 cm long, these can be planted in different places.

Cowpea Fig : 31

Fig : 32 Ipil Ipil

Page 90: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Improved Variety of Cows 85

Contagious Disease of Dairy cow The cow may have various contagious isease Disease of dairy cow can be divided into 3 types-

A. Contagious disease B. External parsitic disease C. Nutritional disease.

Symptoms of some of the diseases and the application procedures of vaccines are given below :

Disease Symptoms of Disease

Application Place of Vaccine

First Application

Next Application

Black quarter Fever and Staggering

Beneath the skin

At the age of 4 months

At an interval of 6 months

Anthrax High fever discharge of blood

through nose, mouth and anus

do At the age of 6 months

At an interval of 1 year

H.septicacmia Fever and swelling of throat

do At the age of 6 months

At an interval of 6 months

Foot and mouth disease

Occurs is mouth tongue and hoof and

salivation

On both sides of neck

At the age of 6 months

At an interval of 6 months

Diseases of Animals due to Deficiency of Nutrition Due to lack of balanced food the animals quite often suffer from various deficiency diseases. A balanced diet should include carbohydrate, protein, fat, vitamins and minerals are available at definite proportion for different ages of animals. Milk fever is worth mentioning among nutritional deficiency diseases. Deficiency Symptoms of Milk Fever and controlling Measures After delivery, cow suffers from calcium deficiency. At this initial stage the animal does not want to eat anything. Animal frequently moves the head, pushes to tongue outside the mouth, muscles, head and legs shiver. In the second stage the animal lie down supporting on the chest. The animal keeps her head on the shoulder. In this stage the cows should be pushed calcium injection. Besides milk fever, cow may also suffer from diseases like osteomalicia, ricket, blindness and other diseases due to lack of minerals and vitamins.

Page 91: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

86 Agricultural Education

Preventive and Control Measures of Cattle Diseases It is essential to adopt the following preventive and control measures to combat the cattle diseases.

1. Hygienic living condition

2. Balanced food and pure drinking water.

3. Protection from wild animals,

4. Administration anthalmintics to control parasite,

5. Segregation of the sick animals,

6. Seek advice from the veterinary doctors and vaccinate the healthy animals against diseases.

7. To bury the deceased animals carcass.

8. Living house, feeding vessel, water vessel, etc should be cleaned with disinfectant, such as savlon and iodine.

Animals should be vaccinated in time against all infectious diseases. Mosquitoes, flies, ticks and other insects should be killed to protect the animals against ring worm, humpoore and external parasitic diseases. In order to keep the cattle healthy and free from internal parasites, such as round worms, tape worms and liver fluke, the cattle should be reared in a hygienic condition. Pure drinking water and fresh food should be supplied in order to keep the cattle healthy.

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. What is correct yield of milk per day from an improved variety of hybrid cow?

a. 5 litre b. 15 litre

c. 25 litre d. d. 35 litre

Page 92: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Improved Variety of Cows 87

2. Due to the shortage of pasture land in Bangladesh- i. Production of crops is decreased. ii. Green grass for cattle is decreased. iii. Milk production is decreased. Which one of the following is correct? a. i & ii b. i & iii c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii Read the following paragraph and answer question nos 3 & 4. Rahela bought a Holstein Frisian cow selling two Horiana breed of cow. The weight of the cow was 500 kg. Rahela is now solvent as she gets plenty of milk. 3. How much green grass should be fed to Rahela’s cow per day? a. 12-15 kg b. 19-20 kg c. 25-30 kg d. 35-40 kg 4. How many litres more milk Rahela gets for purchasing a Holstein Frisian cow than

she used to get from the sold cows? a. 6-7 litre b. 13-14 litre c. 18-19 litre d. 24-25 litre Creative Questions (CQ)

Sabera bought a hybrid cow with a calf. She feeds napier grass grown in her own land and looks after them with care. During flood she fed water hyacinth to the cow and it fell ill and milk production decreased.

a. What is a hybrid variety of cow?

b. How flood is responsible for the cow falling ill?

c. What type of precaution should Sabera take so that she would not face any problem in future?

d. “If you feed green grass to the cow, you will get milk throughout the whole year” evaluate the saying.

Page 93: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 2

Fattening of Cattle In this process of fattening of cattle calves are selected and they are given special food, care and management. Due to these factors calves grow very rapidly and within a very short time and large amount of beef can be obtained from them. The cattle of Bangladesh is undeveloped. Their average body weight is 125-150 kg. Only 30-40 per cent of beef of these animals is consumable. Most of the cattle suffer from malnutrition and parasitic diseases. As a result, most of the cattle are emaciated and can not meet up the demand of protein. There is acute deficiency of protein for human diet in Bangladesh. Human being on an average need 62 gm of protein per day, but the people of Bangladesh get only seven gm per head a day. This deficiency can be met through fattening procedure of cattle. Implementation of this fattening process is of great important. This programmer can be repeated 2-3 times a year. Within four months of the beginning of the process the cows become worth selling.

Purpose of Fattening

1. A substantial profit can be obtained within a very short time.

2. Capital with profit can be realized within a very short time.

3. Animal protein deficiency can be met.

4. Unemployment problems of the young man can be solved.

5. Good business can run with small capital.

6. Financial solvency can be achieved.

7. Better utilization of surplus foods of houses along with the locally available foods.

For this purpose, some special food is given to the cow and this is called straw mixed with urea and molas

Preparation of Food

Preparation of straw mixed with urea and molasses For every two kg of dry straw 1.5 kg of pure drinking water, 250 gm of molasses and

Page 94: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Fattening of Cattle 89

50-60 gm of urea are necessary. First of all the straws are to be cut into pieces. Then the molasses and the urea are to be mixed with required amount of water. Now the straws are to be spread in a container. The mixture Urea molasses of land water is to be sprayed uniformly on it so that all straws are soaked and no water remains unused. Usually 2-3 kg of molasses mixed straw is taken by each animal. After preparation the straws are to be covered with polythene. Food remains in good condition up to three days after preparation. A right dose of urea should be used.

A sample of preparing 10 kg of fattening concentrate food is given below :

Components of food Amount

Wheat bran 2.0 kg Rice kura 3.0 kg Pulse bran 2.0 kg Til cake or ground nut 2.5 kg Dry fish meal 0.5 kg Iodized salt 100 gm Chalk 20 pieces Total 10 kg

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-12

Spreading of urea and molasses mixed water over thestraw

Fig : 34

Straw are cutting into pieces Fig : 33

Page 95: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

90 Agricultural Education

Cow Fattening Method

The method is divided into three steps, such as :

1. Calf selection and purchase

2. Treatment of the animals for worms

3. Supply of food to the animals.

The calf is to be selected and purchased on the basis of the following factors

1. Bull calf of about 1.5-2.5 years of age or with 2-4 permanent teeth

2. The forehead of the calf should be long and broad.

3. Hybrid calf will give better profit

4. Skin must be loose

5. The joints of the bones should be thick.

6. Colour of the animal should be attractive, such as red and black.

7. It is better to purchase calves with above mentioned charecteristics from the locality. It may ensure hereditary qualities of the animal. It should be noted specially that—

i. If the selection is not proper, there is less probability of profit.

ii. Short sized calves should not be selected.

Treatment of worm Diseases

In Bangladesh 95% of the cattle are infested with worms. Worms are of several types, such as round worm, tape and the liver fluke. Round worm creates anemia and deteriorates health. Tape worm attack liver and lung. Flat worm attacks the liver. For treatment of worms the stool, saliva and mucus should be examined and medicine should be given as per advice of the doctor. Emaciated animal should be given blood and other medicines.

Supply of Cattle food

The food chart of cattle for fattening should be of special type. The food chart should

Fig : 35 Hybrid healthy Cow

Page 96: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Fattening of Cattle 91

more carbohydrate, protein, fat and vitamins than the general food formula. Amongst the protein, starch and fat the most mentionable components are rice and wheat bran, fish meal, mineral mixture, salt and molasses. Food mixed with urea and molasses are used for fattening cattle. Urea and molasses can be mixed with food in two ways.

a. Mixing with straw and

b. Mixing with concentrate

If urea and molasses are fed with straws, it should be cut into small pieces and fed to the animal with rice and gruel. Some salt is to be used with the food. If urea and molasses are added with concentrate, the straws must be cut into pieces and mixed with gruel, bran, cake, salt, vitamin and mineral salt. Besides, the unused domestic wastes like vegetables and fruit proteins, if added, can increase the nutritional value of cattle food. Cattle should be given enough green grass. If there is shortage of green grass, leaves of ipil-ipil, jack fruit, babla, kanchan. Then sugarcane top, maize plants, dhaincha leaves may be fed. These leaves may be cut into small pieces and mixed with straw and concentrate. It is essential to Feed the essential to feed the cattle, straw processed with urea or silage, because this processed food contains high amount of protein. Concentrate food of 3-4 kg per day should be fed to each animal. This food should be fed in two equal doses, fifty per cent of the food in the morning and fifty per cent in the evening. A cow needs 5-7 kg of green grass a day. Ipil lpil leaf and other herbs may be fed if available. In winter, the animal should be given warm water. This helps in the process of fattening. The cattle must be given pure drinking water. Urea is a poisonous substance. Therefore, all kinds of precautionary measures must be taken in using urea as a cattle food.

Precautionary Measures in Using Urea

1. As urea is poisonous, well measured doses must be used.

2. Sick animals should not be fed urea.

3. Urea should never be fed directly mixed with water or gruel.

4. If urea molasses block is fed, urea molasses mixed with straw or simple molasses should not be fed.

5. Urea should never be fed to a calf less than one year of age.

Page 97: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

92 Agricultural Education

Practical 1. Title of the Experiment : Fattening of cattle Materials

(a) Bull cal of 1-2 years of age

(b) Food : green grass, concentrate food, molasses, straw, urea and water

(c) Anthalmintics (to deworm)

Work Process

1. Arrange to visit an animal fattening farm.

2. Compare the characteristics of a purchased calf with the characteristics mentioned in your text book.

3. Go to the dwelling place of animal and observe carefully.

4. Be acquainted with the worm killer (anthalmintics) and its application.

5. Observe the procedure of mixing urea and molasses with straw.

6. Be acquainted with the balanced and concentrate food.

7. Collect informations about the profit in the fattening business.

8. List all informations in the practical note book.

9. Submit the practical note book to the class teacher.

Exercise Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. How much green grass to be fed to a fattening cow per day?

a. 1-3 kg b. 3-5 kg

c. 5-8 kg d. 8-10 kg

2. In stead of green grass a cow can be fed-

i. Wastes of jack fruit, dhaincha leaf and sugar cane top.

ii. Dhaincha leaf, jack fruit leaf and ipil-ipil

iii. Gruel, jack fruit leaf and ipil-ipil leaf

Page 98: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Fattening of Cattle 93

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question Nos. 3 & 4.

Ashok has a farm for fattening cow. Everyday he mixes up urea and molasses with straw for 5 cows in his own hand. This way he makes 9.5 kg of food every day and feeds the cows.

3. In this case Ashok does not include in the cattle food-

i. Dry straw

ii. Corn food

iii. Urea & molasses

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. i & iii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

4. To mix up urea with straw prepared for his cow how much molasses is used by Ashok?

a. 425 gm b. 525 gm

c. 625 gm d. 725 gm

Creative Questions (CQ)

1. Some months ago new cow farmer Raja Mia bought 5 cows from a distant market for fattening with a view to selling those during Eidul Azha. The sizes of cows are almost same but one cow did not develop permanent teeth. He first gave a treatment for removing worms. As a balanced food he included limited molasses and green grass side by side 3 kg of concentrate food per cow. He started feeding straw mixed with urea and molasses at the advice of village cow trader Aziz Mia and at this one cow suffered from loose motion.

Page 99: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

94 Agricultural Education

a. How many months are required to become a fattening cow worth selling?

b. Explain the definite cause of becoming sick of one cow after feeding straw mixed with urea and molasses.

c. Prepare a list of concentrate food with quantity for cattle farm of Raja Mia.

d. “Fattening procedure of cattle can play one of the roles to meet the deficiency of protein of human” evaluate the statement.

Page 100: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 3

Rearing of Goats

From ancient time goats were known as Bejoar and Ivex aas wild animal. Of these the Black Bengal variety of this country has been evolved from Iranian Bijoar species and the Black Bengal variety of Bangladesh has been brought from Iran and China through Tibet. About 65% of world production of goats are produced in Bangladesh. Africa produces 30% of goats, and the rest 5% is produced in America, Europe and Australia. It is understood from this information that goats are produced and reared mainly in the densely populated countries of the world. In Bangladesh goats are mainly reared by farmers of poor ability.

Goat is a valuable asset of Bangladesh. There are many advantages of goat rearing. Some main advantages are mentioned below :

1. Self employment and income : All members of a family including the young members can rear goats. This is a self employment which brings income. A family can earn about ten thousand taka by rearing 4-6 goats in a year.

2. Fulfilling the Demand of Protein : Goats are called the poor man,s cow. Most of the people of Bangladesh is a common feature.Goat milk and meat can fulfill the demand of protein of our people. So be rearing goats, this protein deficit can be fulfilled. Some poultry feed can be prepared by using the intestinal waste materials of goats.

3. Earning Foreign Exchange : The hides of goats can be exported to increase foreign exchange earning. The hides of black Bengal goats of Bangladesh has great demand in foreign countries because of its high quality.

4. Setting up Small Scale Industry : Small scale Industries for scientific preservation of goats bones, Hooves, horns, milk and meat are important in Bangladesh. Small industries can also be set up for producing nutritious food. It ensures income, self employment and foreign exchange earning. So it may be concluded that rearing of goats in Bangladesh is very much profitable.

Page 101: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

96 Agricultural Education

Extending Goat Rearing in Bangladesh :

The government of Bangladesh has taken up wide extended activities to provide scope of rearing goats by local the farmers. Considering the advantages of rearing goats, small family farming and commercial farming of goats can be possible. On the basis of advantages and abilities, some farms mentioned below can be set up.

Open System Rearing : About 8-10 goats can be reared in this system.

Semi-intensive Farming : Goats may freely move outside by day and at night they are kept confined in this kind of farming.

Goats Farming in Intensive System : Goats are kept fully confined and controlled in this system of farming.

Small Forming in House Hold : This type of farm can be made through rearing 2-5 goat.

Interrelated Goats Farming : Goats can be reared in fruit gardens (example-coconut, betel nut, mango, jack fruit, guava, litchi). In this kind of farming income is possible from both goat rearing and fruit garden. It should be mentioned here that for social development a number of 10-15 she-goats and one he-goat should be reared in every village.

Any one can get help and service from the government of the country by setting up goats farm considering the advantages discussed above.

Model for Setting up Goats Farm:

To extend the programme of setting up of goats farm in the country, a model can be followed.

Selection of farm

Government financial help

Breeding of goats Collection and distribution of goats

Granting loans Marketing of goats Training

Page 102: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Goats 97 Goats Food in Commercial Farming : Goat’s food are mainly of two kinds. They are :

1. Grass and straw food.

2. Concentrate food.

Goats should be fed grass, straw and leaves regularly. They should also be fed well-balanced concentrate food. In a small scale commercial farming mixture of concentrate food should be prepared and fed as below :

Food Mixture for Kids

Food elements Quantity Rice Crush 2.5 kg Pulse crush 2.5 kg Wheat bran 2.5 kg Til/ mustard oil cake 1.6 kg Protein concentrate 200 gm Soya bean oil 100 gm Molasses 400 gm Salt 100 gm Vitamin 50 gm Dical 50 gm Phosphate 10 kg Rich crush 2.5 kg

Common mixture of concentrate food of Goats in commercial Farming :

Food elements Quantity

Rice / Wheat / maize crush 3.5 kg Wheat bran 2.4 kg Pulse bran 1.6 kg Til / Mustard oil cake 2.0 kg Crushed dried fish 1.5 kg Dical Phosphat 200gm Salt 100gm Total 10 kg

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-13

Fig : 36 Goat of grazing

Concentrate feed of goat Fig : 37

Page 103: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

98 Agricultural Education Concentrate food of goats. Quantity of food: Goats should be given 200-300 gram concentrate food and green grass, straw 1-2 kg. Quantity of Necessary Food Supply of Growing Goats :

Age (Month) Weight

(kg) Concentrate

food (gm/day) Green grass

(gm/day) Straw

(gm/day) Water

(gm/day)

4 8.0 250 400 100 500 5 9.3 300 500 100 500 6 11.5 300 550 100 500 7 13.2 300 620 100 500 8 15.0 750 100 600 600 9 16.8 800 100 600 600 10 18.0 800 100 600 700 11 20.4 800 100 700 700

12(may be pregnant in this month

22.2 800 100 800 700

13 22.2 450 800 100 800 14 23.0 450 800 100 800 15 24.0 450 800 100 800

Practical

Preparing and Packaging of Goat Food : Prepare 10 kg goats food and package it for a commercial farming as directed by your teacher.

Exercise Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ) 1. Generally what kind of farmers are rearing goats in Bangladesh? a. Labourers b. Farmers c. Traders d. Service holders.

Page 104: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Goats 99 2. Rearing of Black Bengal goats are profitable, because their i. hides have great demand in foreign countries. ii. meat and milk are the best sources of protein iii. main food is grass and straw Which one of the following is correct? a. i b. i & ii c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii Read the following paragraph and answer question Nos. 3, 4 & 5. Amena Khatun has a small family goat farm. She follows semi-intensive farming system. She makes mixed concentrate food for goats and feeds them. 3. What may be the possible number of goats in Amena’s farm? a. 1-3 b. 2-5 c. 4-6 d. 8-10 4. What amount of rice crush Amena Khatun mixes up with one kg of concentrate food

for goat? a. 350 gm b. 240 gm c. 200 gm d. 100 gm 5. Amena Khatun is rearing goats by- i. allowing them freely to move outside by day time. ii. keeping them confined at night. iii. keeping them all the time confined during day and night. Which one of the following is correct? a. i & ii b. ii & iii c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii

Page 105: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

100 Agricultural Education

6. How many goats are needed to form a small family farming?

a. 1-3 b. 2-5

c. 3-4 d. 4-7

Creative Questions (CQ) 1. Shaheda Begum is rearing 15 Black Bengal goats by Goats Farming in intensive

system. She feeds the goats mainly concentrate food. Recently she feels the necessity of feeding grass to the goats. So she tries to convert her farm to an integrated goat farming.

a. What is the origin of Black Bengal specis of goat.

b. Describe goat farming in intensive system.

c. Mention the necessary elements of concentrate food mixture for one day in Shaheda Begum’s farm.

d. Compare the process of goat farming in intensive system and integrated goat farming system.

Page 106: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 4

Rearing of Sheep

The weather of some area of Bangladesh is very favourable for sheep rearing. Sheep is a very gentle animal. They roam like nomads in a big group. They need little food, but pasture habit is more. Sheep are reared for meat and fur. These are reared on Rajshahi, Noakhali, Sandwip, Mymensingh, Tangail and some areas of Dhaka. In Bangladesh there are about 1.7 million sheep. Indigenous sheep are of very poor quality. Therefore, it is necessary to evolve hybrid sheep. Merino, Ramani Mursh and Lincoln are very famous breeds of sheep in the world.

Advantages of Sheep Rearing

1. Sheep live in groups or flocks. For this reason it is easy to rear them.

2. Sheep are cheap, so for sheep business less amount of capital investment is required.

3. Wool, milk and meat can be obtained from sheep.

4. Wool can easily be procured, preserved and exported.

Fig : 38 Improved breed of sheep

Page 107: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

102 Agricultural Education

5. The female sheep gives birth to more than one lamb at a time. So the number of sheep increases very quickly. Within 5-8 months the lambs become worthy of sale.

6. Sheep do not destroy the plants around the house like goats.

7. The dung of sheep contains very good amount of organic matter. So it increases the fertility of soil.

8. The size of the sheep is small. So sheep can be reared in small area.

Sheep Rearing

In Bangladesh the number of sheep is less in comparison to other animals. Sheep are reared in the family like cow and goat. But these sheep are indigenous. They are small in size and produce less meat. Good quality garments cannot be made from a low quality wool but we can earn millions of dollar by selling wool of the sheep of improved breeds. This can be done through the improvement of local breeds, adopting the process of hybridization. For this reason we should rear sheep adopting modern technology.

Dwelling place and Sheep care

The sheep has better adaptability with environment in comparison with other cattle. They can live on very low quality food. In our Country no hygienic arrangement and proper care are provided for sheep rearing. During the recent time the authority has realized the importance for breeding to improve breed of sheep. To rear improved breed of sheep, better dwelling house and proper care are necessary.

Dwelling House

Like other cattles, sheep also need suitable dwelling house and proper care. The

Sheep Training in the pasture land Fig : 39

Page 108: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Sheep 103

sheep farm is to be built in such a way so that there is adequate supply of air and light, can be cleaned easily and inexpensive. The house of the sheep should consist of two roofs. There should be a small yard behind the house. The sheep can graze there in the morning and in the evening. There should be arrangement for collecting all litter and food in the yard of the house. The shed for housing the sheep can be built with the help of bamboo, straw or corrugated iron sheet. When building a shed for sheep following factors need to be kept in the mind :

1. The house should be south facing. The fence in the north or east may him a well of 75 cm width. And wire net measuring 105 meter may be placed about it. It will ensure easy air supply and the room will remain dry.

2. The height of the room should be 2.5-3.meter.

3. It should have facilities to store machinery and food in the room.

4. Each adult sheep of indigenous breed needs one square meter of space.

5. There should be additional rooms inside the house.

Fig : 40 Improved dwelling house of sheep

Care The gestation period is of sheep 145-150 days. Each sheep should be supplied with

Page 109: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

104 Agricultural Education

400-500 grams concentrate food like wheat bran, rice bran, oil cake and mineral salts along with green grass. In the pregnant condition the stool of female sheep should be examined and drugs for worms should be administered. All wastes should be disposed off 2-3 times at least a week and dried in the sunlighi so that no parasite or germ can grow. After delivery the sheep and the lambs should be kept on a bamboo platform.

Immediately after delivery. The naval chord of the lamb should be made germ free with the help of tincture iodine. It should be observed carefully so that the lambs can suck colostrums (first milk). For the production of sufficient milk the mother sheep should be given wheat bran, kheshari pulse, oilcake, etc. As a result the lambs and the mother sheep will remain healthy. Production of lamb, wool and milk will increase. Lambs should be given anthalmitics.

Mother sheep and the kids should not be grazed in a water lagged place or pasture land. At this time the lambs should be given wheat or mazie corn, rice, bran, pulse crash, oil cake, mineral mixture and green grass.

In order to retain the fertility the sheep, they should be given suitable food, should have arrangement for good dwelling house and protected from all kinds of diseases. In addition to normal food, the breeding sheep should be given 300-400 grams of concentrate food.

Supply of balanced food

Local sheep can live on eating grass from the fallow land and herbs from the road side. But for the improvement breed balanced food should be provided in addition to these food.

Water

Sheep should be supplied with sufficient amount of pure drinking water. Usually the necessity of water depends on food, weather and age. During summer more water is needed than in the winter. If dry grass and concentrate food are fed, more water will be needed.

Control of sheep diseases

Sheep may be attacked with infectious diseases like any other cattle. The most common diseases are anthrax, black quarter, Hemorrhagic septicemia, rabies or hydrophobia, titenus and foot and mouth diseases. These diseases can be

Page 110: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Sheep 105

prevented by vaccination. Sheep may be attacked with internal parasites as well like round worm, tape worm liver fluke, coccidian and hook worm etc. Tape worm and liver fluke may cause damage the liver. Hook worm and round worm cause create anaemia. Sometimes this anaemia becomes fatal. The stool of the sheep should be examined and anthalmintic drugs should be administered. In case of external parasites the sheep needs to be sprayed with insecticide. The major external parasites are louse, tick, mosquito and fly. Sheep can be saved from malnutrition providing balanced food. In order to prevent the parasites, litter, food and water must be made germ free. Carcass of the dead sheep should be burried in a proper way. The stool, urine and litter should be burnt and disposed as soon as possible.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-14

Page 111: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

106 Agricultural Education

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ) 1. At what age kids of sheep become suitable for sale? a. 1-2 months b. 2-3 months c. 4-5 months d. 5-8 months. 2. Sheep’s liver is damaged by- i. Black quarter and tetanus. ii. Tape worm and liver fluke iii. Liver fluke and coccidia Which one of the following is correct? a. i b. ii c. iii d. i, ii & iii Read the following paragraph and answer question Nos. 3 & 4. Fahim Khan is rearing sheep. He is thinking to build a south facing house of standard measurement for living of 10 sheep. 3. He wants to make the house facing south, so that i. the house will not be damaged. ii. the house will remain dry. iii. air can easily be ventilated. Which one of the following is correct? a. i & ii b. i & iii c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii 4. Minimum area of the house for Fahim Khan’s sheep will be a. 6 sq m. b. 8 sq m.

c. 10 sq m. d. 12 sq m.

Page 112: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Sheep 107

Creative Questions (CQ)

1. Comparing the commercial importance between goat and sheep, Jharna Begum of Moheshpur, district Jhenidah started rearing of sheep in her own house. At present she owns 20 sheep. As the number of sheep increased she planned to make a separate house for the sheep.

a. Write down the name of a famous breed of sheep.

b. Describe one cause of making the house of sheep south facing.

c. Design a drawing for a standard farm of Jharna Begum for the sheep.

d. Analyze the commercial importance of the decision taken by Jharna Begum for rearing of sheep dropping the plan for rearing the goats.

Page 113: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Sections 5 Slaughtering Of Animals And

Collection Of By-Products

In Bangladesh a big numbers of cows, buffalos, goats and sheep are slaughtering everyday for number consumption. In Bangladesh Everyday many cows, buffaloes, goats and sheep are slaughtered. The main objective of slaughtering is to get meat. From these slaughtered animals, we can also got hides, wool, fat, bones, intestine, blood, hoofs and horns. In our country unskilled people slaughter animals and collect hides. As a result many of the hides are destroyed while skinning and other by- product are wasted. So animals should be slaughtered and the skin should be removed in a scientific methods.

Slaughtering of animals and collection of By-Products

There are various of removing the methods skin from a slaughtered animal. It is possible to have good quality hide, clean meat and different by-products if the procedures mentioned below are followed :

1. Sick animals should never be slaughtered. Animals for slaughtering should be examined by the veterinary doctor to ensure that the animals are healthy and suitable for slaughtering.

2. 12 hours before slaughtering, all supply of concentrate and other solid food should be stopped. The animals should be given sufficient drinking water before slaughtering. This helps remove the skin easily.

3. It is better to slaughter animals in the morning. Animals for sacrifice should also be slaughtered in the morning.

4. The slaughtering place should be neat and clean. Animals for sacrifice should also be slaughtered adopting good facilities. For laying them down so that the skins are not bruised.

5. During slaughtering the heads of the animals should be a little tilted in order to help the blood to flow out smoothly. Lines shall have to drawn with the tip of a knife from throat over the chest and stomach. another line is to be

Page 114: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Sheep 109

drawn in the same way from the knees of front legs. This is to be joined with the first one.

6. 6All the blood should be allowed to come out from the body of the animal.

7. Animals should be hanged from branch of tree and skin should be removed slowly in the banging condition. These will prevent any kind of damage to the skin. If there is no facility for hanging, the skin may be removed from throat, chest, stomach, legs to downwar

8. One should be careful that the blood, dung and mud are do not get mixed with the meat. After collecting the meat these should be cut into pieces on a clean place. Care should be taken so that dogs, cats and other animals do not enter the slaughtering place.

Precautionary Measures

Arrangement should be made to sell and preserve hides within 5-6 hours of slaughtering.

Collection of skin in Modern Methods

The hide should be spread on or dry and neat place and all meat trees fat, blood should be removed. After clearing the skin well common salt should be sprinkled and rubbed probably. After the first application of salt is absorbed.

Sufficient salt should be applied again in the same way. For each cow’s skin 4-5kg of salt and for each goat’s skin one kg of salt should be applied.

Collection of by-products from the Animals

Blood, fat, stomach and intestine, horns and hoofs of animals can be used in the industry after proper collection. Blood and bone meal can be used as animal food. Fat is used in soap making. Manure is prepared from bone. Woolen clothes are prepared from fur. Button and combs are made of horns of cows and buffaloes, Stomach and intestine are used as poultry and fish food.

Skin is being removed Fig : 46

Page 115: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

110 Agricultural Education

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. Within how many hours of slaughtering of animals the skins are to be removed and collected?

a. 3-4 hrs b. 5-6 hrs

c. 8-9 hrs d. 11-12 hrs

2. What is the best time for slaughtering an animal?

a. Morning b. Noon

c. Evening d. At dead of night.

3. One of the by-products of animals is

a. Blood, meat and fur

b. Hide of animal and hoofs

c. Hides of animals, intestine and hoofs.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. ii

c. iii d. i & ii

Read the following paragraph and answer question Nos. 4 and 5.

In Friday morning at 10 a.m. Suhag’s father slaughtered 5 goats and a cow on the occasion of his sister’s marriage ceremony. Due to various disturbances of the wedding house his father and others remained busy and as such the hides were hung on a tree till 6 pm in the evening. Since he could not arrange their sale, he preserved these applying some salt.

Page 116: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Sheep 111

4. Salt is applied to the skin-

i. on the fur side

ii. keeping the inner side upward

iii. on both sides of the skin.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. ii

c. iii d. i, ii & ii

5. How much salt will be needed to preserve the hides of slaughtered animal properly?

a. 4 kg b. 5 kg

c. 10 kg d. 14 kg

Creative Questions (CQ) 1. Mr. Maruf sacrificed a cow in this year’s Eidul Azha. Before slaughtering he got the

cow examined by a veterinary surgeon. Due to the shortage of expertise he himself removed the skin. When he went to sell the skin he found that some meats were still attached with it and the skin was having some cut at different places. For this reason he had to sell the skin at a very low price.

a. Mention one name of by-product of a cow.

b. Explain the cause of examining the cow by a veterinary surgeon before slaughtering.

c. What were the methods to be followed by Mr. Maruf to collect a high quality skin?

d. Explain what role can be played by the by-product of animal to the economy of the country.

Page 117: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Chapter Three Domestic Poultry Husbandry

Section 1

Methods of Poultry Rearing The total number of domestic fowl in Bangladesh is about 20.689 crore. The purpose of poultry rearing in Bangladesh is mainly for egg and meat production. The indigenous breeds of poultry of Bangladesh is not so much high yielding and they lay only 45 eggs per year. The indigenous breeds of poultry are not usually reared for commercial purpose. The improved or hybrid varieties are mostly selected for commercial poultry farming. Mainly three methods of poultry rearing are usually used to rear the poultry.

These are :

1. Free range system poultry farming.

2. Semi-intensive system poultry farming.

3. Intensive system poultry farming. Poultry rearing in free range system : Free range system is the most traditional and popular poultry farming system in Bangladesh. In this system, a small house is made using a wooden frame or bricks or clay walls giving a roof of two light shades. The chicken moves freely during the day time.

Fig. 47 White Leghorn

Fig. 48 Poultry rearing in Intensive system

Page 118: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Methods of Poultry Rearing 113

They stay in their house at night. Chickens are kept confined within the house during storms and rain and also during severe cold. They normally take the household waste food, insects, vegetables etc through their day long movements; as a result chicken do not get enough balanced food or diet in this system of farming.

The major advantages and disadvantages of poultry farming in free range system are mentioned below :

Advantages :

1. Additional food requirement is lower as it takes some amount of feed during moving freely around the homestead.

2. The chicken attains the capacity to adapt themselves with the local environment and that is why they are resistant to diseases.

3. Both the cost and labour requirement are lower in this system.

Disadvantages :

1. As the chicken is free to more around the whole day, is scope for them to get stolen.

2. It leaves its droppings all over the place and also lays eggs in unspecified places.

3. Destroy the homestead vegetable gardens.

4. Creates disturbing situation for the neighbours.

5. Only 15-20 chicken can be reared at a time.

6. Only the indigenous breeds of chicken are possible to rear in this free range system.

Poultry rearing in semi-intensive system :

Small two roofed poultry houses are prepared arranging 1500-2000 square centimeters space for each bird. The difference is that in this system a certain area, in front and sides of the house, is hedged by bamboo sticks and wire nets at a height of 1.5 meter. The space within the boundary is known as run.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-15

Fig. Poultry rearing in semi-intensive system

Page 119: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

114 Agricultural Education

It is better to make the run area partially shade by planting trees. The run area should be kept dry and clean. Both the advantages and disadvantages of semi-intensive system are givey below:

Advantages :

1. A large number of chicken can be reared.

2. Exotic and hybrid poultry breeds can be reared.

3. Less risk of getting stolen.

4. The laid eggs can be collected properly.

5. The chicken can be kept within the control of the owner.

Disadvantage :

1. More space is required

2. More cost is involved in giving wire net boundaries.

3. Supply of balanced diet is to be ensured.

4. More labour is required.

5. Additional care is needed for getting satisfactory production.

Poultry rearing in Intensive system :

Chicken rearing in a house in a cage having litters on the floor composed of straw, saw dust or rice husk etc is usually known as intensive system of poultry rearing which is specially suitable for establishing commercial farms with a large number of chicken. For rearing chicken in this intensive system double roofed tin shed house is prepared for the purpose. The floor of this type of house should be cemented.

Chicken can be reared in two main methods in this intensive system :

1. Rearing of chicken floor

2. Rearing of chicken in cage.

Chicken rearing on the floor :

Chicken can be reared on the floor in two way :

Such as A) litter system and B) Deep litter system. Both for the litter and deep litter systems, the following spaces are required for each bird :

Page 120: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Methods of Poultry Rearing 115

Each chicks need 600-900 square centimeter per chicks in the litter or deep litter system, growing chicken need 1800 square centimeter and adult chicken needs 2500-2700 square centimeter floor space in litter or deep litter system.

(a) Poultry rearing on litter system :

The term litter means a natural cover or a cover of an organic material. A litter used in this section in meant for organic bed or cover in order to absorb the poultry excreta and urine. The litter bed is prepared on the floor of the house using rice husk, saw dust, crushed straw and leaves. The thickness of the litter should be 5-7.5 cm. For that reason the poultry excreta does not come in direct contact with the floor. The poultry houses are required to be cleaned at an interval of 2-3 months.

(b) Deep litter system :

Rearing of poultry having 15-20 centimeter thick litter in house floor is known as deep litter system. In most of the countries of the world, modern poultry farms are established in this method. The litter material such as chopped straw, saw dust etc may be turned up and down by hoe like equipments weekly. If the litter becomes too moist then the litter may be removed by a new litter bed on the floor.

Advantage and disadvantage of deep litter system :

Advantages :

a. The straw, saw dust etc get mixed with poultry excreta and converted to a good quality composts.

b. The litter may be used as fish food.

c. The floor of the house and the litter are not required to be cleaned frequently.

d. Bad smell are usually not found in the house.

e. The litter absorbs the moisture part of the faces and thus the litter remain dry.

Disadvantage :

a. Requires more space.

b. Electricity cost is higher.

c. Labour cost higher.

d. More time is required to identify and separate diseased birds.

Page 121: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

116 Agricultural Education

Poultry rearing in cage : Poultry rearing in cage system is getting popularity at present in Bangladesh. In this system, separate chambers are made for each three poultry birds in the cage as per following measurements. Length : 38 cm Width : 30 cm Height : 45 cm The cage is prepared by small thin rods or wire frames. The poultry seed, water and laying arrangements are made in the cage. Trays made of tin are placed at the bottom of each chamber so that the excreta droppings are collected there. This tray should be cleaned out twice a day. The bottom of the cage is slightly tilted towards the front. The eggs when laid rolls forward. The poultry birds can enter their head and neck to take feed and water given outside the cage.

Practical Tittle : Preparation of Deep litter in intensive poultry farming system.

Materials : Saw dust or rice husk (for preparing deep litter of 5 poultry birds)

Methods of working :

1. Collect the saw dust or rice husk from nearby saw mill or rice husk mill.

2. Spread the saw dust or rice husk giving a 15-20 cm thickness on the floor of the poultry house.

3. level and compact the bed.

4. The class teacher will be evaluate the students by examining the deep litter prepared by them. Tidiness will be considered and evaluated.

Fig. Poultry rearing in cages

Page 122: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Methods of Poultry Rearing 117

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ) 1. Poultry can be reared in how many types? a. 2 b. 3 c. 4 d. 5 2. If chicken is reared in deep litter system i. less space is required ii. floor remains dry iii. bad smell is less in room. Which one of the following is correct? a. i & ii b. i & iii c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii Read the following paragraph and answer question Nos. 3, 4 & 5 Kali is working in a health centre. Since the price hike of daily essential things went exorbitantly high, it became impossible for her to run the family. So she intended to rear chicken. 3. Kali followed poultry rearing in free range system, because - i. less food was required ii. diseases were less iii. labour and cost were low Which one of the following is correct? a. i & ii b. i & iii c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii 4. What type of poultry was there in Kali’s farm? a. domestic b. foreign

c. hybrid d. counche(indigenous)

Page 123: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

118 Agricultural Education

5. How many chickens were there in kali’s farm?

a. 10-25 b. 15-20

c. 20-25 d. 25-30 Creative Questions (CQ) Bakul, a daughter of an insolvent farmer family, is a meritorious student of class-IX. One day sitting by the side of her own bamboo garden she decided to go for rearing of poultry from the knowledge she acquired in class VIII on rearing of poultry. She took some money from her mother along with her own money of junior scholarship and started rearing of 20 hybrid and foreign breed type of chicken. She selected poultry rearing in semi-intensive system.

a. Name the main systems of poultry farming .

b. Explain one cause of Bakul’s poultry farming in semi-intensive system.

c. Draw a figure for the poultry house of Bakul in semi-intensive system of poultry farming.

d. Explain with logic why Bakul decided to follow semi-intensive system poultry farming in stead of free-range system poultry farming.

Page 124: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 2

Poultry Farming in Homestead

The objectives of rearing poultry birds in the homestead are to meet the nutritional need of the family and some additional income. Advantages of Poultry Farming in the Homestead The major advantages are the following:

a. Young men and women, children and the old people can directly be involved in working during the leisure time.

b. Economic benefits may easily be derived.

c. The farm may be managed by women within the household.

d. The unused places of the homestead may be utilized in poultry farming.

e. All members of the family can be free diseases caused by deficiency of nutrient mineral elements.

The first essential activity in doing poultry farming is the selection of breed. Leghorn, Australorp, Fyomi etc. are the breeds or improved poultry birds. White leghorn lays 250-350 numbers of eggs, Australorp lays 150-200 and Fyomi lays 200-250 eggs in a year. These breeds can be reared for egg protection Among the improved breeds important for meat purpose are Starbro, Lohman, Highbro, Broilers, etc. These improved breeds produce 1.5-2 kg of meat in a period of only two months. Chicks, growing chickens and fertile eggs may be purchased from government and non-government poultry farms. The fertile eggs of improved poultry breeds purchased from reliable poultry farms may be hatched through local hens and the chicks may be reared in the homesteads. These poultry birds may be fed with wheat bran, rice bran, oil cake, powdered dry fish and salt mixed with homestead waste food materials.

Page 125: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

120 Agricultural Education

Small capital Hygienic poultry house Balanced food Regular vaccination Minimum labour

Meeting nutritional demand of the

family

Producing eggs for hatching and consumption

Additional income of the

family

Participation in the protein production

of the country

Increases scope of

employment

Organic manure

Fig. 51 : Advantages of poultry farming Poultry House

The site for poultry house should be on a high land, plain and well drained. The poultry house may be built with bamboo, tin and straw. The house should be strong enough to the protect the poultry birds from wild animals. About 2.70 square meter floor space is required for 10 adult poultry birds in a house.

The litter for using on the floor may be prepared by mixing sufficient saw dust or rice husk with half a kilogram of lime giving a thickness of about 5 cm. The litter mixture of the floor (saw dust or rice husk) should be turned up and down at an interval of about seven days.

When the litter gets excessively moister or very compact then it should be replaced by a new litter bed. Food pots and water pots with enough food and water should be kept in the poultry house in hanging condition. Egg laying nests are to be prepared and kept in the isolated corner of the house.

Presently, cage system of poultry farming is gradually increasing in urban and rural areas of Bangladesh. Much care should be taken so that sufficient ray can enter into the house and gases like ammonia can go out of the house. Otherwise the house will

Page 126: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Poultry Farming in Homestead 121

be full of bad smell. For a better aeration, the length of the house should be faced to the east-west direction. Wire nets should be given at the two sides of the house which will ensure better aeration and entrance of sufficient light. If the house is made of tin then bamboo mats should be given at the lower surface of the tin. It keeps the temperature of the house low during summer season and keep the temperature high during the winter season. Advantages of poultry Farming in Cage System Poultry farming cage system has many advantages. The major advantages are the following : a. Large number of poultry birds may be reared in a small limited space. The cost of

preparing house is very low even excluding the price of preparing the cage. b. Care taking of the poultry birds becomes very easy. The disease infested poultry birds

may be identified and isolated very easily and thus proper health care may be taken. c. As disease incident is reduced, the cost for

medical care of the poultry birds is also reduced and the production constraint of poultry farming is solved.

d. The demand of food reduces and the hens lay more eggs.

e. The family nutrition is fulfilled. The farm may be started with 5-10 poultry birds which may be increased to large number in future.

f. The farm may be set up in the verandah or below the stairs in a corner, if no other space is available in the premise.

g. The mortality rate of poultry birds is 5% maximum. h. The farm becomes self or family managed, thus additional labour and labour costs are not

involved. i. The possibility of getting the eggs dirty or broken is greatly reduced. j. No litter bed is required for the poultry farm. k. Collection of egg is very convenient. Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-16

Fig: 51 House for poultry birds

Page 127: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

122 Agricultural Education

Balanced food for poultry Birds :

The balance food may be defined as the food which is composed of food elements in a proportion as required for the nutrition of the animals. The major functions of a balanced food in a body may be mentioned below :

1. Provides energy to the body.

2. Fulfills the natural deficiency of the body components.

3. Increases the production of meat and eggs.

4. Increases resistance to diseases.

There are mainly six ingredients of balanced food. These are :

1. Protein

2. Carbohydrate

3. Fat and oil

4. Mineral

5. Vitamin

6. Water

Balanced food is prepared by combining these types of compounds in definite proportions. The food requirement of poultry birds varies according to their age and stage of growth. For example, the protein and mineral requirements of poultry birds in growing stage are very high. The adult poultry requires higher energy elements. The protein content of a chicken food should be 20-21 percent, while it should be 18-19 percent for growing birds and 16-17 per cent for egg laying hens. The protein requirement for meat producing broiler breed is higher, that is 21-23 per cent. The balanced food for poultry birds may be prepared by mixing wheat bran, maize and rice bran, etc, starchy energy producing materials with protein sources, such as powdered dry fish and oil cake. Fats and oil compounds may be obtained from oil cakes. The bone met and snail (oyster) shell grounds are mixed with the food for supplying mineral elements in the balanced food. These minerals make the egg shell of poultry birds stronger. Vitamins are also mixed with balanced food. One should take care that the food elements which are mixed in the balanced food are in exact proportions.

Page 128: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Poultry Farming in Homestead 123

The leaves of ipil ipil, pieces of yellow and red vegetables may be used as good sources of vitamins, and mixed with poultry food. Mineral and vitamin premixes may be purchased from the market and mixed with the balanced food. Enough clean water should be supplied to the poultry birds along with balanced food. Tubewells and wells may be used as sources of clean water. Water helps in digestion of food and control the temperature of the body. Water regulates circulation of blood in the body, keep the body organs fit for work and greatly helps in excretion of body metabolic wastes. The food requirements of poultry birds of various ages and growth stages are not same. Every chicken takes about 10 grams of food on an average per day in the first week. The food requirement gradually increases with the increase of age of the birds. One adult egg laying hen takes about 120 grams of food per day. In closed poultry farming system, the entire food should be given in front of the poultry birds in food containers, In an open or semi open farming system about half the amount of the food should be supplied in food containers for the poultry birds. List of food for poultry Birds

Food items poultry Chicken (0-8 weeks) grams

Growing birds (9-20 weeks) grams

Laying Hens (21-72 weeks) grams

Wheat, maize, rich crushed

540 500 460

Rice bran 180 210 250 Wheat bran 30 50 50 Til oil cake 120 120 120 Powdered dry fish 100 90 80 Snail shell (oyster) grounds

25 25 73

Salt 5 5 5 Total 1000 1000 1000

Page 129: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

124 Agricultural Education

Special Note The food items and its quantities may slightly be changed according to the availability and price of the food materials. Enough clean water supply should be be ensured. In a 100 parts food, three parts of vegetable pieces should be mixed. The mineral and Vitamin premix should be mixed with the balanced food as per recommendation of the manufacturer. Homestead Poultry Farms The homestead poultry farms are managed by the family members.

Benefits of poultry bird rearing as sources of food and income of the family

If a poultry farm is established in a homestead then all the materials, such as egg, meat, chicks, adult poultry and poultry execrate as organic manure are produced at a time in the farm. Economic profits may be obtained by selling these products in the market. It brings economic solvency and also creates self reliance of the farmer. The protein requirements of the family members are met by eggs and meat. The excess places of homestead lying idle are utilized in these farms. The unemployed young people can get their self employment in such a poultry farming.

Poultry farm

Poultry farm Excreta Fish food

Production of fish

Family use

Sale in the market

Organic manure

Fruit and vegetable production

Family use

Sale in the market

Egg and meat

Sale in the market

Page 130: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Poultry Farming in Homestead 125

Rearing poultry Birds in Household Farms

The poultry farms of homesteads are usually smaller in size and capacity. The farm may be initially started with any suitable number of poultry birds, starting from 5-10 numbers. However, there should be one cockrel for nine hens. This proportion of cockerl and hen will be 1:9. It should be maintained in case of any number of total poultry birds in the farm. The spaces of the homestead, such as sides, open fronts, roofs, verandah and the space below the stair may be used for such household poultry farming. White leg horn, Australorp and Fyomi breeds of poultry may be selected if the objective of the farm is to produce eggs. A detailed plan of the poultry farm should be laid out before going to actual investment in the farm.

The plan must include the following issues :

1. The primary cost requirement for making the poultry house and purchase of poultry birds.

2. The costs for poultry food.

3. The costs of vaccination and other necessary medical care.

4. Income from the eggs, chicks and adult birds.

5. Neat profit excluding the total expenditure from the total income.

For determining the actual profit from the farm, the expenditure and income statements should be documented and prepared on daily, monthly and yearly basis. Healthy and hygienic housing arrangements should be made for the poultry birds. Arrangement should be made for balanced food and use of pure water. Steps for controlling diseases and drainage of excess water should also be taken simultaneously. Regular vaccination should be given to control infectious diseases.

Poultry birds may be reared in open and semi-intensive systems in the homestead farms. Presently intensive system of poultry farms are gaining popularity due to several advantages. Cage system of poultry farming is best for premises where the spaces is very limited. The intensive system of poultry farming is extensively being used in the urban and rural areas of Bangladesh.

Page 131: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

126 Agricultural Education

It creates bad smell if the poultry excreta is not regularly cleaned in the cage system of poultry farms. For this reason, improved cage system has been evolved with the integration of cage and litter systems. In this system, the lowest layer (bottom) of the cage is placed about above the floor where litter is placed, the litters are required to be stirred from time to time with a stick. When the litter gets moistened after some days, it may be dried in the sun and may be prepared for reuse. The Cage Litter Integrated System has been found to work successfully in trial farms. this system may be very good for homesteads because bad smells are minimized in such management.

Advantages of the Cage Litter Integrated System

a. Poultry droppings are not required to be cleaned every day.

b. Poultry droppings are is cleaned at an interval of few months. The farm may be established on the roof of a building.

c. The litters when used for several times are converted to organic manures.

d. Both the complexity of work and labour requirement are minimized.

Essential things to do in a Poultry Farm

For successful poultry farm one must carry out the following activities :

1. Purchase good breed of poultry birds.

2. Prepare in the poultry house suitable environment.

3. Arrange temperature control for small chicks.

4. Supply balanced food and pure drinking water.

5. Give vaccination to the poultry birds in time.

6. Not keep poultry birds of different ages and different breeds in the same place.

7. Not allow entrance of visitors in the farm.

8. Isolate diseased birds and make arrangements for their treatment.

9. Bury dead birds.

10. Toxin mixed water should be used at the entrance of the farm for the cleanliness of foot.

Page 132: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Poultry Farming in Homestead 127

11. Keeping water mixed with iosone in a pot at the entrance of the farm for disinfecting the

foot of the workers in the farm.

Practical

Title of the Experiment : Preparing a List of Local Poultry Farms and Visiting One Poultry Farm

Materials

1. Writing copy, Pencil

2. Prospectus or reports of the poultry farms (if available).

Work Process

1. Prepare a list of poultry farm available in the locality with their address including government, non government and private farms.

2. Visit and write down the detail description of an enlisted farm.

3. Write down all the information and your comments in the practical note book and show it to the class teacher.

4. Later on, collect poultry birds from the enlisted poultry farms when necessary.

As per description of the farms, class teacher will observe and check the list of poultry farms and its addresses and will give make after proper evaluation. If appropriate poultry farm is not available nearby, the school has is arrange a farm of distant place through stady tour. The activity and performance of the students should be evaluated accordingly.

Page 133: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

128 Agricultural Education

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ)

1. Highest death rate of poultry rearing is

a. 5% b. 6%

c. 7% d. 8%

2. In poultry rearing in cage system-

i. litter is needed.

ii. large space is required

iii. cost is lower comparatably

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. ii

c. iii d. i, ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 3, 4 & 5

Shilla started getting eggs from 18 local variety hens reared at her homestead without the presence of any cockerel. After some days she tried to hatch the collected eggs by a counchey (local variety) hen. But it was seen that no chick was hatched out.

3. The eggs of Shilla’s farm was not hatched out, because-

i. hatching was done by a counche hen

ii. the eggs were addled

iii. the eggs were unfertilized.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. ii

c. iiid. d. i, ii & iii

Page 134: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Poultry Farming in Homestead 129

4. How many kg of food will be required in Shilla’s farm?

a. 2.15 kg b. 2.32 kg

c. 2.64 kg d. 2.78 kg

5. How many cockerel should be kept in Shila’s farm?

a. 1 b. 2

c. 3 d. 4

Creative Questions (CQ)

List of food for poultry chicken (Layer, 21-72 weeks)

Sl No. Food items Quantity

01. Wheat, maize, rice crush 460 gm

02. Wheat bran 50 gm

03. powdered dry fish 80 gm

04. Rice bran 250 gm

05. Til oil cake 120 gm

06. salt 5 gm

07. water as required

Majul started getting sufficient eggs from 100 layer hens of his farm by giving measured food as per the list given above. But a good number eggs were wasted during carrying as their shell were soft.

a. What is balanced food?

b. Explain the cause of egg shells of Majul’s farm remaining soft.

c. Make a list of food required for a week in Majul’s farm.

d. “Balanced food is very important for Majul’s farm to get an expected success.” evaluate the correctness of the statement.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-17

Page 135: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 3 Production and Preservation of eggs

The key point of commercial poultry farming is the higher production of eggs. In the egg producing poultry farm the income will increase as the production of egg increases. Because, egg is the only source of reproduction and multiplication. Egg has multifarious demand in the market. For Example : a. For production of chicks b. For consumption c. For business purpose. Characteristics of an Egg Laying Hen The main characteristics of a hen which can lay more eggs may be mentioned as follow :

1. The eyes are large and sensitive.

2. The beaks are curved below and thick.

3. The ear lobe is large, soft and oily.

4. The neck is short, broad and thick.

5. The back is large and straight.

6. The abdominal bone is long and curved gradually.

7. The skin is thin, soft, and oily.

8. The abdomen is soft, large and fatless.

9. The moulting of the feathers is delayed but rapid when occurs.

10. The legs are strong and short, the space between the two legs is wide.

11. The anus is large, thick and moist.

12. The space between pelvic bones is 3-4 fingers and between the abdominal hone and pelvic bone is 4-5 fingers.

Fig : 52 Hybrid Chicken

Page 136: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Production and Preservation of Eggs 131

High yielding laying hen Low yielding laying hen

Fig : 54 Method of Identifying high and low laying hen

Causes of Reduction in Egg production

The main causes for which egg production of a laying hen may be reduced are given below : 1. If the existing weather changes abruptly, for example excessive hear or excessive cold. 2. If a large number of poultry birds are reared in a small limited space. 3. If the food is changed abruptly. If the food is not balanced and there is deficiency of one or more food items such as protein, carbohydrate, calcium, etc. 4. When egg laying hens are transferred from one place to another place or one flock to another flock. 5. If the poultry birds are seriously afraid of due to some reasons or hearing abnormal sounds or seeing ferocious wild animals. 6. Due to the shortage of sufficient pure drinking water. 7. During normal molting of feathers. Composition and Elements of an Egg An egg of hen usually composed of 10 per cent shell 60 per cent albumen and 30 per cent yolk. The albumen mainly consists of protein and the yolk contains sufficient quantities of fats and oils. The nutrient values of poultry egg (hen and duck) other than the shell per 100 grams content are mentioned below :

Page 137: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

132 Agricultural Education

Element Per cent in Hen Egg Per cent in Duck Egg

Water 73.7 70.4

Protein 12.9 13.3

Fats and oils 11.5 14.5

Starch 0.9 0.7

Minerals 1.0 1.1

Total 100 100

Kilo calorie (unit) Energy per 100 grams of the material

63 191

The nutrient value of duck egg is not less than the hen egg, rather it is comparatively higher. The egg of duck has a characteristics raw odour, tha't why many people do not like to take eggs of duck. Moreover, eggs of duck contain some amino acid having sulphur. The people who have allergic reaction to sulphur also may show allergic symptoms to duck eggs when eater by them.

Preservation of Egg

Storing of eggs, keeping its nutritional value and quality intact and stopping of putrefection is known as preservation of eggs. The period for which the egg is stored without any quality change is known as preservation period. There are many methods of egg preservation and preservation period is known to vary according to method employed for this purpose. Egg is usually preserved for mainly tow purposes, such as (1) for producing chicks and (2) for consumption. the eggs selected for hatching can be preserved for 7-10 days in winter season and 3-4 days in summer and rainy seasons. If the eggs require to be preserved for more than five days then the preservation temperature should be at 60°-65° fathrenheit. In places where there is no electricity, eggs may be preserved by using sodium silicate, hot water or lime water for a certain period. In this case, the hatching rate of the eggs preserved for the first one week is satisfactory, while the hatching rate of the eggs preserved for the second week is reduced. The hatching rate of the eggs preserved for the third week is greatly reduced.

Page 138: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Production and Preservation of Eggs 133

Very few people in our country practice preservation of eggs. Every year 10-15 per cent eggs are lost due to lack of preservation. Some additional eggs are consumed by the people after meeting family requirement. The other portion is spoiled. Such a loss is incurred due to lack of timely preservation of eggs in appropriate methods. Sometimes price of eggs becomes very low. The egg traders then face financial loss. Sometimes the price of eggs becomes so high that general people cannot take required quantity of eggs, So there should be a balance of price which should be maintained for a longer period. That is why in our country it is essential to preserve eggs. Bangladesh is predominantly a sub-tropical humid country. The temperature remains higher for a long period. Due to this warm climate the eggs get decomposed within a very short time. Eggs are preserved in earthen pots with rice husk or straw in the rural areas of Bangladesh. But the eggs are not well kept by these traditional methods. Scientific methods should be employed for egg preservation to ensure successful egg business. The temperature of the room where eggs are preserved should be strictly controlled. Most of the rural villages of Bangladesh do not have power facility. Supply of electricity is not available or not ensured in many towns and suburban areas. In these areas, it is not possible to preserve eggs controlling the room temperature effectively, Besides, the method is costly. It is not possible to follow this method by egg traders having low capital investments. Some simple methods of egg preservation are briefly described below. Indigenous Method In this method one pit of hole is to be made on the kucha floor. Then an earthen pot should be placed in that hole. The side of the earthen pot should be filled by charcoal covering an area of about 30 cm. The eggs will be put in to the earthen pot. The charcoal given around the pot should be moistened every day by water. As a result, the temperature of the earthen pot will remain cool and eggs will be in good condition.

Page 139: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

134 Agricultural Education

Shell Pores Concealing Method The shell of the egg is full of micropores or small openings. Air enters into the eggs through these extremely small opening and when water vapour enters into the egg through these pores, the egg is spoiled. When the eggs are dipped in lime water or sodium silicate water, then the small pores of egg shell are concealed. Thus water vapour cannot enter into the egg from the atmosphere and the quality of the egg is restored. In this way the eggs are kept good for a long period. Fig. : 55 Egg preservation by local method

Fig : 56 Method of egg preservation through concealing the small pores of the egg shell

Egg Preservation by Sodium Silicate Method Eggs may be preserved for a certain period soaking them in diluted sodium silicate solution. Before soaking, the eggs should be fully cleaned. In this method one kg of sodium silicate is diluted in about 10 litres of water. The mixture should be made thoroughly by shaking uniformly. About 15 dozen a eggs may be preserved by this amount of solution made. It has been found from the experiments that eggs may be preserved for a period of two and a half months by this method in the weather prevailing in our country. The cost for preservation of eggs is comparatively lower when the sodium silicate method is employed. The common farmers and egg businessmen can successfully preserve eggs in this method in the local households.

Page 140: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Production and Preservation of Eggs 135

Egg Preservation by Lime Water Soaking Method The eggs may be preserved in two ways by lime water soaking method. These are described below.

Fig. : Egg preservation by lime water soaking method The First Method About 1.2 kg of lime should be diluted to 20 litres or water. The solution should be kept for sedimentation and cooling for 10 minutes. Then the transparent water above the sedimented lime solution may be used for egg preservation. The clear lime water should be taken in a pot and the eggs should be soaked in it. Eggs may be preserved by this method for about two months. The Second Method About one kg of lime, one litre boiled water after cooling, additional four litres of water and 250 grams of powdered salt should be well mixed in a pot. Then the mixture should be allowed for sedimentation over night. After one day the clear solution excluding sediments should be taken in a pot. Then the selected eggs should be taken in an earthen bowl and the lime water should be poured in such a manner than the eggs are submerged in the solution. Eggs may be preserved by this method for about two months under rural condition of our country. Egg Preservation Hot Water Method Eggs may be preserved by treating the eggs in hot water. The eggs should be treated for 15 minutes when the temperature of the water is 60° fahreheit or for 3-4 minutes when the temperature of the water is 140° fahrenheit. After soaking the eggs should be taken out from the pot and should be kept in another fresh pot. The quality of eggs remains unchanged for about a month when this hot water soaking method is employed.

Page 141: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

136 Agricultural Education Egg Preservation by Oil Method Oil method of egg preservation if followed should be employed just after laying of the eggs without delay. The eggs may be soaked in slightly warm soybean oil and eggs should be kept in another pot taking them out of the oil. As an alternative way the oil may be sprayed on the eggs by a small sprayer machine. Eggs may be preserved for about 25-30 days by this oil method. The oil applied in this method closes the small pores of the egg shell. As a result the moisture and carbon di-oxide from the internal contents of the eggs can not come out, thus the eggs remain in good condition. About 11,000 to 12,000 eggs may be preserved in 4.5 litres oil. Fig. : Egg preservation by oil application method Egg Preservation Cold Storage Method The room temperature where eggs are preserved is strictly controlled. High temperature is one of the major causes of quality deterioration of eggs. The eggs remain in good condition at a temperature of 10-50 degree fahrenheit in refrigerator or cold storage for many days. However, if eggs are preserved in cold storage with other materials then the preserved eggs may have some bad smell. So cold storage specified for egg storage should not be used for other materials. Eggs if preserved in refrigerator, should be taken out of the refrigerator one hour before use. When the eggs attain room temperature then these can be eaten. Eggs may be preserved in refrigerator for many days at 4°celcius or 36° fahrenheit. The relative humidity of the cold storage should be 70-80 per cent. If the humidity of the storage room is higher, then fungus may be seen on the surface of egg shell and the yolk of the eggs may be turned into blue colour.

Page 142: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Production and Preservation of Eggs 137

Fig. : Egg preservation in cold storage

Practical

1. Title of the Experiment : Selecting a Good Laying Hen and a Less Laying Hen. Materials

1. Collect a laying hen. Steps of Work

1. Observe the body shape, eye, comb, ear lobe and abdominal portion of the hen. 2. Measure the pelvic bone and the abdominal bone and the space between them by

placing fingers on it. Evaluation Write down all the information in the practical note book. Submit the practical note book to the class teacher for evaluation by him. 2. Title of the Experiment : Method of Preserving Eggs Materials 1. Eggs 2. Lime 3. Water 4. Different pots. Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-18

Page 143: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

138 Agricultural Education

Work Process

1. Take 10 litres of water in an earthen bowl and put one kg of lime in it.

2. Put in one day.

3. Submerge one dozen of eggs (hen or duck eggs) in the lime water of the bowl.

4. After 20 minite then day those egg in the fresh air.

Write the details of work you have done or you have observed in the practical note book. the class teacher will evaluate the practical note book.

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ) 1. For preservation of eggs in cold storage, what should be the relative humidity of the

cold store? a. 40-50% b. 50-60% c. 60-70% d. 70-80% 2. In case of layer hens i. skin is thin and soft. ii. neck is thick and short. iii. eyes are small and dull. Which one of the following is correct? a. i b. i & ii c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii. Read the following paragraph and answer question Nos. 3 & 4.

The roof of Rahim Mia’s poultry farm of 100 layer hens was destroyed by storm. Then on emergency basis he transferred the farm to a house by the side of rice crushing mill. Though he gave definite quantity of food the production of eggs decreased.

Page 144: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Production and Preservation of Eggs 139

3. The cause of diminishing of production of eggs in Rahim Mia’s farm is due to

i. the destruction of the roofs of the farm house.

ii. the noise of the rice crushing mill.

iii. the shifting of the house.

Which if the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

4. How much food is needed per day in Rahim Mia’s farm?

a. 10 kg b. 11 kg

c. 12 kg d. 13 kg

Creative Questions (CQ) 1. Poor village house-wife Ankhi was trained on poultry rearing organized by the

directorate of youth development and she established a poultry farm with 100 hybrid varieties white leghorn hens of 20 weeks age. She started getting eggs from her farm within a short possible time due to proper management. She fell in difficulty for being unable to sell all the eggs at a time and some eggs were spoiled by rotting. She became worried and took the advice of veterinary officer and preserved the eggs in indigenous method and her problem was over.

a. What is egg preservation?

b. Explain the cause of veterinary officer’s advice of preserving eggs by indigenous method.

c. Explain the sodium silicate method of preserving all eggs produced in one week in housewife Ankhi’s farm.

d. What role can be played by the method of preserving eggs used by housewife Ankhi in the farms of rural areas of Bangladesh, give your opinion.

Page 145: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 4

Infectious disease of poultry birds

Like all other animals poultry birds are infected by many infectious diseases. The diseases caused by pathogenic organisms are known as infectious diseases. Important among the infectious diseases commonly found to break out in our country are ranikhet, pox, blood dysentery, cholera and duck plague.

Ranikhet

Ranikhet disease is most important among the infectious diseases of poultry in Bangladesh. It is a serious infectious disease caused by a virus organism. Fowls of all ages may be attacked by ranikhet disease. The mortality rate of ranikhet in poultry is about 100 per cent.

Fig. 66 : Fowl attacked by ranikhet disease

Symptoms of Ranikhet Disease

1. The fowl may die suddenly without showing any remarkable symptom.

2. At the first stage eyes of the diseased birds are found to be closed, neck and head are kept in curved or twisted condition. The respiratory trouble starts. The colour of the excreta becomes withish like lime with greenish spots. There may be some blood along with the excreta of the diseased birds (fowl). The respiratory trouble gradually increases. The bird takes breath opening its beak widely producing hitching sound. Saliva drops from the mouth. The weight of the bird is found to be greatly decreased.

3. Shivering occurs in the body, the wings are dropped loosely. The bird becomes lazy and sits lavishly as if taking rest. Tears come out from the eyes. Do not like to take food and water. Egg production is seriously reduced.

Page 146: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Infectious disease of poultry birds 141

Treatment of Ranikeht Disease

There is no treatment of the disease. But in rural areas people believe that some beneficial effects may be obtained if rice mixed with turmeric and tamarind are given to the birds at the preliminary stage of the disease.

Vaccination of Ranikhet Disease

There are two types of vaccines available for ranikhet disease. These are as follows :

a. Baby chicks disease vaccine (BCRDV) for chicks.

b. Ranikeht disease vaccine (RDV) for adult birds.

Fig : 61 Method of pushing the vaccine

Pox

Fowl pox is a serious infectious disease. The disease is caused by a virus pathogen. Usually fowl pox disease breaks out towards the end of a winter.

Symptom

1. The first symptom of fowl pox disease is high temperature.

2. Red spots are seen on the skin of featherless places, around the mouth and head and under the wing. The red spots gradually enlarge to give it a size of lentil grain or even larger size.

3. Small lesions may be seen on the eyes and if so the birds become blind.

Fig. : 62 Symptoms of fowl pox

Page 147: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

142 Agricultural Education

4. The internal surface of the mouth shows ulcerated lesions for which the diseased birds cannot take food. As a result the birds gradually become very weak.

5. If lesions are produced in the respiratory tract then the birds suffer from respiratory troubles.

6. Bleeding occurs during the separation of the scab from the skin.

The diseased birds may not die but the egg production is greatly reduced. The death rate due to fowl pox is 30-40 per cent in case of young chicks.

Treatment of Fowl Pox

The diseased birds should be separated from the flock immediately. The affected place should be cleaned by a fresh piece of cloth or cotton with savlon, dettol or potassium permanganate in water.

Vaccination of Fowl Pox

The chicks of 12 days old should be given pegion pox vaccine. The fowl pox vaccine should be given at the age of 28 days of the chickens.

Cocciyiosis

Blood dysentery is a very serious disease, specially for the chickens. The death rate due to blood dysentery is very high, 70-80 per cent in case of diseased fowl. The disease is caused by one protozoa. The name of the protozoa is 'Eimeria'. the favourable conditions for the incidence of the disease are high humidity and excessively moistened litter. The disease may spread through the food, water and excreta of the diseased birds. The disease symptoms may be sen after 2-4 days of infection.

Symptoms

1. The excreta is watery with excess of bubbles and spots of blood.

2. The bird suffers from serious pain making characteristics sound and shows drowsiness.

3. The birds stop eating food and drinking water.

Page 148: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Infectious disease of poultry birds 143

4. The chicks lie on the litter before death and die after 4-5 hours of suffering. Advice should be taken from the doctor in case of treatment.

Cholera

The disease is known as fowl cholera. Fowl cholera is a serious infectious disease caused by bacteria. The ducks are also affected by this disease. The name of the bacteria is pasteurella maltocida. Cholera causes extensive loss of poultry birds in the poultry and duck farms in rural Bangladesh.

The moist litter, higher relative humidity of atmosphere help the rapid spread of the disease. The pathogens of the cholera disease mainly spread through excreta of the diseased birds, food container and water pot. The symptoms of cholera may be seen after 2-4 days of infection.

Symptoms of Cholera

1. The colour of the excreta becomes yellowish or greenish.

2. The wings drop down and the birds stop eating.

3. Excessive saliva is secreted from the mouth.

4. The comb and the ear lobe changes its normal colour and gradually become bluish.

5. The egg production is gradually decreased and completely stopped at the advance stage of the disease.

6. If ducks are attacked by this disease, it starts rotating keeping the head slanting at one side.

Treatment

If the disease could be identified at the preliminary stage and required treatment is given then it may be possible to save the life of the diseased birds.

Vaccination of Cholera

Cholera vaccine may be given to the poultry birds at the age of about 10 weeks.

Fig: 63 Bird suffering from dysentery

Page 149: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

144 Agricultural Education

Duck Plague Disease

The duck plague disease is caused by one type of virus. It is a serious infectious disease. A large number of duck farms are destroyed due to the out break of this disease. The disease mainly spreads through food materials and drinking water.

Symptoms

1. Loss of appetite, frequent thirst for drinking water etc. are major preliminary symptoms of duck plague disease.

2. The colour of the beak becomes bluish gradually.

3. The excreta becomes watery.

4. The duck shows unwillingness to go to water. Get afraid when see light.

5. Egg production of laying ducks suddenly reduce or stop completely.

Treatment

A duck once attacked by duck plague disease normally go out of treatment. Seriously affected ducks cannot be saved.

Vaccination

The ducks may be saved from the duck plague disease giving regular vaccines.

The following measures should be taken so that poultry birds are not attacked by infectious diseases. The measures are mentioned below.

Fig : 64 A duck attacked by duck plague disease

Fig. 65 : Vaccines are being given for duck plague

Page 150: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Infectious disease of poultry birds 145

1. Rearing disease free poultry birds. Giving preventive vaccines regularly.

2. Feeding disease free and balanced food and water.

3. The poultry house should be kept neat and clean.

4. The litter should be kept dry.

5. Arrangement should be made for proper ventilation and supply of light within the poultry house.

6. Protecting the mixing of litter and food during handling.

7. Using pure drinking water for the poultry birds.

8. Not rear poultry birds of different ages and breeds at the same and time.

9. Protect the access of wild animals and wild birds.

Control of Disease during an outbreak

1. The birds attacked by any disease should be quarantined from the healthy stock without delay.

2. Regular checking of the health of the poultry birds and examining excreta.

3. Arrangement for proper treatment as per suggestions of the veterinary doctors.

4. Not giving vaccination to the poultry bird which is already attacked by a disease.

5. Burying of the dead birds or burning them.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-19

Page 151: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

146 Agricultural Education

Practical

1. Title of the experiment : Learning and Hand on Practice of Giving Vaccination. Materials 1. Vaccine 2. Syringe 3. Needle 4. Distilled water 5. Poultry bird 6. Beaker 7. Glass 8. Cotton 9. Thermo Flask. Work Process 1. At first pick up a poultry bird or a fowl for giving ranikhet disease vaccination. 2. Take the vaccine vial from the flask and mix it with 100 cc of distilled water in a beaker. 3. Then give injection to the fowl at the rate of 1 cc in the muscle of the thigh. 4. Keep all the materials and equipments used in the experiment without damaging these

after cleaning. Evaluation Every pupil should give vaccine to three fowls for learing perfection. They will write down the date and name of the poultry owner along with the description of the poultry bird in the practical note book. Special Note The school authority may arrange this class in a suitable farm or house or in a clinic near the school. The pupils will participate in the programme under the direct supervision of the class teacher.

Page 152: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Infectious disease of poultry birds 147

Fig. : 66 Method of preparing the vaccine

Exercise Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ)

1. Fowl cholera is a —

a. viral disease b. malnutrition disease

c. parasite disease d. bacterial disease

2. If a duck is attacked by duck plague disease-

i. Excessive saliva is secreted from the mouth.

ii. The excreta becomes watery

iii. The colour of the beak becomes bluish.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. ii & iii

c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question No 3 & 4.

In last winter suddenly poultry started dying in Selim’s farm. Finding no cause of it he called

in a veterinary surgeon at advice of his neighbour. The doctor said that poultry birds were

attacked by Ranikhet.

Page 153: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

148 Agricultural Education

3. What symptoms ensured the doctor that Ranikhet was broken out?

i. Saliva and cold were secreted from mouth and nose of the affected fowls.

ii. Fowls were shivering at the excessive cold.

iii. Excreta became watery and white like lime.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. ii & iii

c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii

4. What advice did the veterinary surgeon give?

a. To sell the fowls in the market

b. To slaughter the fowls.

c. To bury the dead fowls

d. To leave them in a distant jungle.

Creative Questions (CQ)

1. Poultries of Sharifa’s farm began to fell ill suddenly. Red spots were detected around the mouth and under the wings of some fowl. Small lesions were seen on the eyes of some others. Some fowls could not take food. In his situation, when doctor was called in, he said that the fowls were attacked by fowl pox. The doctor made Sharifa understand what to do when fowls were attacked by fowl pox. Accordingly Sharifa nursed the fowls and cured most of them.

a. What is fowl pox?

b. Explain how does the disease affect on the poultry rearing?

c. How did Sharifa took care of the fowls according to the advice of the doctor?

d. What steps can be taken to increase alertness of the farm owners about the disease fowl pox, explain.

Page 154: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 5 Rearing of Quail

In some parts of Bangladesh the Quail has been included in the list of poultry industry since 1988. The original habitual of Quail is Japan. The meat and egg of quail is very attractive and tasty.

The weight of an adult Quail is about 150-200 grams. The weight of a quail egg is about 10-12 grams. One Quail can lay about 200-250 eggs per year. The climate and weather of Bangladesh is suitable for rearing Quail successfully. Meanwhile many Quail farms have been established throughout Bangladesh including some areas of Dhaka, Savar and Manikganj districts. The rearing of Quail have some specific advantages which are given below.

Fig : 67 Quail birds with eggs

1. Quail farm may be started with low capital investment.

2. Quail farms are usually smaller in size. So limited space is required for its establishment. As much as 8-10 Quail birds may be reared in a space which is required for a single fowl or duck.

3. Disease problems in Quail is minimum.

4. The problems of giving preventive vaccines are very little.

5. Starts egg laying at the age of 6-7 weeks only.

6. A quail takes only 20-25 grams of food per day.

The Quail is a newly introduced poultry bird in our country. The details of Quail rearing is still not known by the people of our country. For successful Quail production, its technical management practices should be well known to the farmers. The general methods of Quail rearing is similar to other common poultry birds including fowl, ducks and pegions. Quail also needs suitable housing and balanced food to give optimum production of eggs and meat.

Page 155: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

150 Agricultural Education

Rearing House for Quail Chicks The house where the Quail chicks stay and its after cares are taken is known as Quail the Rearing House. Arrangement for controlling temperature is also done in this house. So, the house is also known as brooding house. Space requirement for each Quail chick up to four weeks of age is 125-140 square centimeter. All the holes and breaches should be closed to prevent the entrance of rain water of wild animals and birds. The house should always be kept free of pathogenic micro-organisms and neat and clean.

Fig : 68 Quail chick house of brooding house

Fig : 69 Chick guard for quail chick.

Fig : 70 Chickgard

Arrangement should be made for supplying food and drinking water within the chick guard. Food should be given on trays up to 4-5 days after bringing the chicks in the brooding house. Water pot should be prepared for supplying pure drinking water for the chicks. Quail eggs are hatched in a period of 17-18 days when set in incubators. The weight of each chick may vary between 7-8 grams. These chicks are to be reared on the litters of brooding house and given artificial heat for a period of 4-5 weeks. Artificial heat may be arranged by using electric bulb. A bulb of 40-100 watts may be sufficient as per seasonal variation for 50-100 Quail chicks. In a Quail chicken house one 60 watt electric bulb is sufficient for heating a space of 9.25 square meter or 100 square feet.

Page 156: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Quail 151

The temperature of the brooder house should be as follows : Age Temperature Age Temperature First week 100° 3 Week 90° Fahrenheit Second week 95° Fahrenheit 4 week 85° Fahrenheit

It may be easily understood whether the temperature in the Quail house or brooding house is optimum or not from the behaviour of the Quail chicks. Fig : 71: Temperature is lower Fig : 72: Optimum temperature Fig : 73: Temperature is higher If the temperature is low then the chicks stay in cluster around the centrally placed bulb, below the hover. If the temperature is high then the Quail chicks are scattered and stay near the chick guard, away from the hover. If the temperature is optimum then the chicks stay well distributed throughout the chick guard, run freely and take necessary food. In the case of low or high temperature the chicks do not move freely and do not take sufficient food. Usually artificial control of temperature is essential for the Quail chicks for 3-4 weeks. After that the Quail chickens are required to be transferred to the cage. The light requirement of adult Quail in the Quail house for getting expected rate of egg production is given below. Age of Quail Required Light Hours 5th week 12 6th week 13 7th week 14 8th week 15 9th week 16 10th week 17

Page 157: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

152 Agricultural Education

The Quail chicks have very little capability of controlling its temperature up to the age of three weeks. As a result many chicks suffer from low temperature effects and even die due to cold. The chicks which survive do not grow at the expected rate due to unfavorable temperature. The soft short feathers can not control or conserve the body temperature. Food of Quail Birds Food plays a vital role in regulating the growth and development of Quail chicks. If sufficient food is not available, the body of the Quail chicks may suffer from cold injury due to the shortage of enough calories. The chicks thus die gradually. An adult Quail bird can take 20-25 grams of food. The food should have 22-24 per cent protein. It must have 1700-3000 kilo calories metabolic energy per kg of the food. The list of balanced food as required for Quail birds is given below : Food Item One-Three weeks Above Four weeks Crushed wheat 500 grams 530 grams Rice bran (non cellulytic) 70 grams 90 grams Sesame oil cake 150 grams 150 grams Powdered dry fish 240 grams 180 grams Fempal 55 per cent (protein rich)

25 grams 35 grams

Snail shell crushed 10 grams 10 grams Soy bean oil 2.5 grams 1.2.5 grams Common salt 2.5 grams 2.5 grams Total quantity 1000 grams 1000 grams The per day requirement of food for Quail is given below : Age of Quail Quantity of Food First week 4-5 grams Second week 7-9 grams Third week 11-14 grams Fourth week 15-18 grams Fifth week 18-20 grams Sixth week 20-25 grams The mortality rate of Quail chicks is higher at the primary of its life. One of the main reasons for such a high death rate of Quail is the shortage of pure drinking water. The loss of moisture from the body of the Quail chicks is higher because of the high temperature maintained in the brooder house. Sufficient water must be given to the Quail chicks to meet the water shortage. Otherwise Quail chicks may die for water The mortality rate of Quail chicks is higher at the primary of its life. One of the main reasons for such a high death rate of Quail is the shortage of pure drinking water. The loss of moisture from the body of the Quail chicks is higher because of the high temperature maintained in the brooder house. Sufficient water must be given to the Quail chicks to meet the water shortage. Otherwise Quail chicks may die for water deficiency. Sometimes Quail chicks may fall into the water pot and may die due to excess cold. This quite a common accident and so. Much care should be taken in this respect.

Page 158: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Rearing of Quail 153 The pots of food and water is similar to the pots used for fowls and ducks, but the sizes are smaller. Fig : 74 Food container made of tin Fig: 75 The water pot made of

earthy materials Fig: 76 Quail birds are taking food

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ)

1. How much food does a quail take every day?

a. 20-25 gm b. 30-35 gm

c. 40-45 gm d. 50-55 gm

2. In a year a quail lays eggs

i. 150-200 number

ii. 200-250 number

iii. 250-300 number

Which one of the following is correct? a. i b. ii c. i & ii d. ii & ii Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 3 & 4. Sabuj Mia was rearing 50 chicks of quail in a brooding house of his quail farm. In the brooding house 6 chicks died in the 1st week.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-20

Page 159: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

154 Agricultural Education

3. In the 3rd week how much area is needed in the brooding house for the chicks of quail?

a. 6250-7000 sqr. cm. b. 5000-5600 sqr. cm.

c. 4000-4600 sqr. cm. d. 3500-3800 sqr. cm.

4. In the 1st week of birth in the brooding house the cause of death of quail chicks is

a. want of water b. want of food

c. want of mineral d. want of heat

Creative Questions (CQ)

1. Quail is the new member in the poultry industry of Bangladesh. Since the poultry farmers require to know the methods of quail rearing, so it is included as a subject in the youth training centres. Shamima underwent practical training on various steps of quail rearing such as chicks rearing house, temperature, water, light and food management and began to rear quail in her own house. One day she observed that the quail chicks stayed in cluster below the hover.

a. What may be weight of a full grown quail bird?

b. Why did Shamima decided to go for rearing of quail bird?

c. Why did the chicks of quail stayed in cluster below the hover and what action shamima took for that?

d. Rearing of quail is very prospective in poultry industry of the country-present the statement with logic.

Page 160: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Chapter Four

Pisciculture Section -1

Resources of Bangladesh What is meant by fish resources :

Fish includes those cold blooded vertebrate animals or creatures which live in a marine environment, respirate with the help of gills and move with the help of fins. Besides fish, there are also many other vertebrate and invertebrate animals that live in water. Among these animals, many of them are consumed as food like fish and also used for some other purposes. For example, the whale and the dolphin though live in water are not considered as fish. These are higher level mammals than the marine fish. The shrimps and crabs are also not included in the fish class. These are invertebrate animals of lower level than the fish. Shrimps are the most important resource of many countries. Eighty per cent of the foreign currency earned by Bangladesh through the export of fish and fish products is contributed by shrimps alone. Most of the marine plant weeds are used by the fish as food. However, some water weeds create hazards in fish cultivation. On the other hand the water body containing the fish, shrimps and marine animals are the inputs used in fish cultivation and the manpower or labour employed in the fisheries sector are also included in the fishery resources.

There are about 260 species of local fish and 12 exotic species of fish living in the sweet water of Bangladesh. About 475 species of fishes are available in the Bay of Bengal. The fish of our country may be categorized into three groups, according to the origin and nature of habitat. These are as follows :

1. Marine fish

2. Coastal fish

3. Inland water body fish

Page 161: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

156 Agricultural Education

The inland water fishes may again be classified into two groups, such as open water fish and stagnant water fish. 1. Marine Fishes The Bay of Bengal is situated at the southern part of Bangladesh. There is a great treasure of fishes of various species and shrimps found in the Bay of Bengal. The fishes living in the saline water of Bay of Bengal are known as marine fish. For example, Rupchanda, Churi, Bele, Datina, Hilsha, Rita, etc. The marine fishes contain sufficient quantities of iodine and vitamin 'A'. Usually the marine fishes are not cultivated in an organized way. The marine water area of Bangladesh is about 1,66,000 square kilometers. The contribution of marine fishes to the total fish production of the country is about 20 per cent.

Fig : 77 : Marine fishes 2. Coastal Fishes The water of the estuary, river curve and the coastal belt of the Bay of Bengal is semi saline in nature. The fishes available in these areas are known as coastal fishes. For example Koral, Poa, Laitya, Bhetki, etc. Presently fishes and shrimps are being cultured in the coastal area.

Fig : 78 Coastal fishes

Rupchanda

Shark

Hilsha

Bhetki

Laita Poa

Page 162: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Resources of Bangladesh 157

3. Inland Water Fishes A. Open Water Fishes The rivers, canals, beels and flood plain areas of Bangladesh are included in the open water bodies. While tanks and ponds are considered as stagnant water bodies. The Water of the inland water is sweet in nature. Fishes are not usually cultivated in the open water bodies. The fishes growing in the open water bodies are known as open water fishes. For example Ruhi, Katla, Pangus, Aeir, Gazer, Shol, Boal, Koi, Shing, Magur, etc. The area of inland water bodies in about 40 lacs and 47 thousand 316 hectares. More than 41 per cent of country's fish production in coming from this inland water bodies. `

Fig : 79 Fishes of inland water bodies B. Stagnant Water Fishes

Tanks, ponds, ditches, etc. are mainly classed into stagnant water bodies. Fishes are produced through culture in these water bodies. The fish species which are cultured in tank, ditches and ponds are known as stagnant water body fishes or stangnant water fishes. For example, Ruhi, Katla, Mrigel, Kalibush, Rajputi, Silver carp, Grass carp, Mirror carp, Tilapia, etc. There are about 13 lacs of such ponds where these types of fishes may be cultivated. About 25 per cent of the total fish production of the country is contributed by the stagnant water bodies.

Boal

Koi

Magur Shol

Aeir

Page 163: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

158 Agricultural Education

Fig : 80 Stagnant water fishes Cultivation of Shrimp There are about 24 sweet water species and 36 saline water species of shrimps found to grow in Bangladesh. But all these types are not suitable for cultivation. Galda shrimp is cultivated in the sweet water and Bagda shrimp is cultivated in the saline water. Culturing Shrimp in the Ponds Galda shrimp is the biggest size of the shrimps available in the sweet water bodies. Galda shrimp may be cultivated singly or in combination with Ruhi and Katla in the ponds. The cultivation methods of Galda shrimp as monoculture is described below : Selection of Pond The selection of the pond in one of the important points of Galda shrimp cultvation. Adequate amount of oxygen supply is required for shrimp culture. The oxygen content of pond water may be increased by changing the water. For this reason, ponds for shrimp culture should be selected which are situated near the rivers, canals, beels, haors, fountains or deep and shallow tubewells. Ponds having the loam and clay loam textured soils have been found to be more suitable for shrimp culture. The water depth of the pond is good when it is within 1-1.5 meters. There should not be any big tree on the bank of the pond. Preparation of the Pond

At first the voracious and unwanted fishes should be removed through drying the pond or applying chemical poison of fishes. One kilogram of lime per decimal of pond

Katla Ruhi

Kalibush

Mrigel

Carpio

Page 164: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Resources of Bangladesh 159

water area should be applied after removing the voracious fishes. The fertilizers should be applied after five days of applying the lime. The rates of fertilizer application per decimal of pond should be : cowdung 7 kg, urea 100 grams, triple super phosphate 50 grams and muriate of potash 20 grams.

Releasing Shrimp Fries

The fish fries should be released in the pond after 5-7 days of fertilizer application when the colour of the pond water turns light green or brown. About 100 shrimp fries may be released per decimal of pond.

Fertilizer Application

Natural foods are created in the pond when fertilizers are applied in the pond. For this purpose, fertilizers should be applied to pond water at an interval of seven days after stocking fries in it. The rates of fertilizer application per decimal of pond water is cowdung 200 grams, urea 50 grams, triple super phosphate 25 grams and muriate of potash five grams.

Supplementary Food

The food naturally produced in a pond after application of the fertilizers are not sufficient for full nutrition of the shrimp. That is why supplementary foods are required to be given to the pond regularly. Shrimp culture is mostly dependent on the nutrition from the supplementary food. Rice bran, wheat bran, mustard oil cake, powdered bry fish, snail shell crusts, salt and vitamins are mixed proportionately to prepare balanced food of shrimps. Materials required for preparing one kilogram of food are mentioned in the table given below. The per day food requirements for one thousand shrimps are also given in another table.

Preparing Food for Shrimp Culture

Ingredients Quantities Rice bran or wheat bran 500 grams Mustard oil cake 150 grams Dry fish powder 250 grams Snail shell crushed powder 95 grams Salt 3 grams Vitamin mixture 2 grams Total 1000 grams

Page 165: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

160 Agricultural Education

Food Requirements for 1000 Shrimps According to Age

Age of Shrimp Fries Daily Food Requirements

First month 15 grams

second month 75 grams

Third month 750 grams

Fourth month 800 grams

Fifth month 1 kg

Sixth month 2 kg

Shrimps usually take food in the evening or at night. So, the necessary food for shrimps should be supplied according to the number of shrimp fries released and in the afternoon or in the evening every day.

Water Management and Cultural Practices

Much care should be taken so that fertilizers and supplementary foods applied in excess can not pollute the pond water by decomposition. Occasional change of the pond water ensures rapid growth of the shrimps. The shrimps become very week while molting. For this reason some branches of trees with the leaves removed and bamboo support may be fixed in the pond so that the shrimps can take shelter in it while changing their shells.

Harvesting of Shrimps

Shrimps may be ready for sale in the market within 6-7 months provided optimum cultural practices are followed. The weight of a marketable size of shrimp is about 80 grams, when these are harvested and sold in the market. The Shells of shrimps are found to be strong during full moon or in dark nights. So, this is the best time for harvesting shrimp.

Production

When cultured scientifically as mentioned in this section, the production of Galda Shrimp may be 8-10 kg per decimal of pond.

Page 166: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Resources of Bangladesh 161

Coastal Ghers for Shrimp Culture There are about 2 lacs 20 thousand hectares of land area available in the southern coastal belt of Bangladesh which is suitable for cultivation of shrimps. The area is spread over from Satkhira of Khulna division to Cox's Bazar of Chittagong division. The shrimps naturally available are cultured in saline water within the embankment of coastal area in association with the other fishes in bigger sized water bodies. The bigger sized water bodies are divided into smaller size water bodies covering 4-5 acres each by giving ails or banks. Such water bodies prepared in the saline water for the cultivation of shrimps are known as 'Ghers'. Bagda shrimps are cultivated within the Ghers. The depth of water in Ghers is maintained at 0.5-1.0 meter. Arrangements are made for changing water and controlling water salinity allowing entrance and drainage of tidal saling water. Much care should be taken so that unwanted voracious fishes can not enter into the Ghers at the time of allowing and draining of the tidal water into the Ghers. Trap nets with small holes may be set at the mouths of the Gher for the purpose. Salinity of the Gher water should be controlled within the range of 10-30 ppt (parts per thousand). Usually, Bagda shrimp fries are released or accumulated in the months of Magh and Falgun. About 200 Bagda shrimp fries may be released per decimal of the Gher area. If properly cultured 8-10 km of Bagda shrimp may be produced per decimal of the Gher in a period of 7-8 months. Causes of Reduction of Fish Production and Remedial Measures The principal natural source of our fish production is the open water bodies. The rivers, canals, beels, Kaptai Lake and flood plain area of Bangladesh are included in the inland water bodies. Fish is not usually cultivated in open water bodies. The naturally grown fishes are harvested from these water bodies and such harvest comprises the natural fish resources of the country. About 50 per cent of the country's fish production comes from the open water bodies. The production of fish from these sources is getting reduced due to different reasons. The main causes for which the open water body fishes are getting reduced may be grouped into two classes. These are : 1. Natural causes 2. Human created causes

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-21

Page 167: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

162 Agricultural Education

1. The Natural Causes Like all other animals, fish also requires a favourable marine environment for their normal life processes and reproduction. Because, the only media for fish life is water. The conditions of rivers and canals of Bangladesh are changing day by day due to its geographical position and the imbalance in the environmental situations. As a result usual water streams of the rivers and canals including the Padma are reducing by raising charlands. Rivers are being inactivated and also changing their course of flow. Such affected rivers are becoming unsuitable for habitation of fishes. There are so many beels and haors which have already been filled up due to silting. All these factors in combination are causing reducation of the area of total open water bodies. Besides, unfavourable reactions are gradually occuring due to deforestation and desertification processes intensively. Untolerable droughts, untimely and excessive rainfall and hazardous floods are being experienced every year. All these phenomena influencing the life processes of fish negatively are causes of different problems. The natural reproduction and fry production processes of fishes thus being seriously hampered by the reduction of the open water bodies and diversified changes in the environment. As a result the fish production from the natural open water sources is getting seriously reduced. 2. Human Created Causes Bangladesh is a densely populated country. The open water fish is getting reduced due to so many reasons, such as meeting food requirements of ever increasing population, fulfilling daily life needs and related many other activities. The major causes among them are : ⎯ Drying up of beels and jheels due to irrigation of water for the producation of more food

crops. ⎯ Reduction of water bodies due to its conversion to crop fields through land filling. ⎯ Indiscriminate use of insecticides for high yield of rice production hampering the normal

life processes, reproduction and breeding and destroying natural food of fishes. ⎯ The occurance of disease and death of fishes due to the deposition of toxic industrial

wastes in the river.

⎯ Disturbing the natural habitat and movement of fishes due to the making of unplanned roads and embankments.

Page 168: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Resources of Bangladesh 163

⎯ Indiscriminate harvest of fish fries and mass harvest of female fishes carrying eggs in the breeding season.

⎯ Use of Prohibited nets and harvest of young nala and jatka fishes. ⎯ Harvest of fishes from the rives and canals at untolerable rates. ⎯ Reduction of water bodies due to siltation and soil erosion resulting from the

deforestation activities. ⎯ Reduction in water stream due to the cross embankments made in the upper stream of

international rivers flowing through Bangladesh. Remedial Measures The importance of fish resources is enormous in fulfilling the demand of the mass people, creating employment opportunities and earning valuable foreign currencies. It has already been mentioned previously that the contribution of open water fisheries is more than 50 per cent to the total fish production of the country. In this context, it is very important to strengthen fisheries and fish conservation acts. Establishment of fish shelters, releasing fish fries in open water sources and through simultaneous prevention of fish resources destruction activities. Releasing Fish Fries in Open Water Bodies

The programmes of releasing fish fries and its technical managements are being executed in the country for increasing fish producation and to check the low trends of fish production in open water bodies. Under this programme Department of Fisheries started releasing fish fries in the selected open water bodies since 1988. Meanwhile the programme showed positive results. An amount of 200-250 kg additional fish have already been produced per hectare of the open water body. However, the general people of the country should perform more duties and responsibilities in order to run the programme more successfully.

Duties and Responsibilities of Mass People

Goals and objectives of a programme may be achieved through mass awareness and direct participation of the people. It is very much possible to execute the programmes through direct participation and awareness of the general people and thus to increase the fish production in inland open water bodies. The responsibilities and duties may be as follows

Page 169: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

164 Agricultural Education

1. Public awareness may be strengthened against catching of fish before they are fully grown.

2. The Ruhi fish below 23 cm length size is known as Nala fish. The small Hilsha of the same size is known as Jatka. According to the fish conservation act of Bangladesh, harvesting of the Nala and Jatka fish is punishable crime. It is possible to produce tons of fishes if the immature fishing of the Nala fish and Jatka fish could be stopped. So, the mass people should abide by the Fish Conservation Act strictly.

3. There are many fish 'Avoyasram' or shelter places which have been declared at several places for the purpose of sustaining the increased production and conservation of breeding fishes. Fishing in the Avoyasram is strictly prohibited. The mass people should keep away themselves from fishing in the Avoyasram in order to ensure natural fish breeding and to maintain fish species diversity.

4. The fishing community should be organized in the modern method of cooperatives. They should be made understand that the open water body is their own resource. So fishing of under sized fishes will cause them to incur a great loss to them. If these small fishes are allowed to grow better then they themselves will be economically benefited. Thus it is possible to increase the fish production of open water bodies to the expected level through creating mass awareness, people's direct participation and initiating social movement to make the fish conservation programmes more popular.

Practical

Title of the Experiment : Identification of Different Fish Species Materials 1. Tray ⎯ 4 2. Forcep ⎯ 2 3. Marine fishes ⎯ Rup Chanda, Hilsha, Rita Coastal Fishes ⎯ Poa, Laita, Bhetki In land water fishes ⎯ Pangus, Aeir, Gajer, Boal, Ruhi, Katla, Koi, Shing, Magur,

etc. Stagnant water body fishes ⎯ Cultivable Ruhi, Katla, Mrigel and Silver Carp fishes. 4. Balti ⎯ 1 5. Pencil, scale, etc.

Page 170: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Resources of Bangladesh 165

Steps of work

1. Collect the fishes mentioned above from the market with the help of class teacher and bring the fishes in the laboratory and keep them in the bucket.

2. Write down the main characters of the fishes after studying in the laboratory.

3. Arrange the fishes of four sources in four different trays separately and identify them through discussion with the class teacher.

4. Draw the pictures of the fishes as identified in the practical note book and level the identifiable characters.

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ) 1. Which is not fish? a. Whale and shark b. Shark and coral c. Coral and porpoise d. Whale and shrimp. 2. The best time to catch shrimp is a. Morning or afternoon b. Night or evening c. Rainy season or winter season d. New moon and full moon 3. Causes of reduction of fish production in sweet water is- a. Reduction of water bodies. b. No cross embankment made in the upper stream. c. Natural destruction of food. Which one of the following is Correct? a. i & ii b. i & iii c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 4 & 5. Karim Mia cultivated Bagda shrimp at the gher area. He arranged trap nets at the mouth of the gher. At this, allowing and draining of irrigation tidal water becomes easy.

Page 171: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

166 Agricultural Education 4. Water in the gher is allowed to enter and exit for

i. the entrance of shrimp fries

ii. controlling the salinity of water

iii. change the water.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. i & iii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

5. A net is required to be placed in the mouth of the gher to

a. Control the shrimp fries b. control the weeds

c. control the jatka d. control the voracious fishes.

6. Which of the following is coastal fish?

a. Bele b. Hilsa

c. Poa d. Boal

7. For cultivation of Galda Shrimp-

i. pond water is to be changed

ii. loam and clay loam soils to be ensured.

iii. pond should be selected near the coastal area.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 8 & 9.

Mr. Hasan took a pond of 2 bigha area on lease located by the side of a beel to cultivate galda shrimp. He used lime to remove unwanted fishes. After some days he applied reasonable amount of fertilizer in the pond. He waited for some days and released fish fries in the pond.

Page 172: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Resources of Bangladesh 167

8. How much urea was to be applied to Mr. Hasan’s pond?

a. 56.6 kg b. 66.6 kg

c. 76.6 kg d. 86.6 kg

9. Mr. Hasan waited for some days and released fish fries to

a. bring about a change in the temperature of water

b. remove unwanted fishes

c. prepare natural food

d. increase the supply of oxygen.

Creative Questions (CQ)

1. Seeing the success of galda farmer Karim Mia, fish farmer, Rahim Mia decided to cultivate galda shrimp singly in a pond of 10 decimal area located by the side of his canal. The soil of the pond was loam, depth of water was about 1-5 meter and there was no tree on the bank of the pond. He performed necessary cleansing and applied fertilizer to the pond in a usual manner. He followed the list of food items given below and got a grand success.

Name of the ingredients Quantity

Rice bran, wheat bran 500 gm

Dry fish powder 250 gm

Snail shell crushed powder 95 gm

Mustard oil cake 150 gm

Vitamin mixture 2 gm

Salt 3 gm

Total 1000 gm

a. What is fish?

b. Explain one characteristic of galda shrimp

c. Prepare a daily food list with quantity of Rahim Mia’s pond for 6th month.

d. Analyze different aspects of Rahim Mia’s success in galda shrimp cultivation.

Page 173: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 2 Different Methods of

Fish Culture

Bangladesh is rich in water resources. There are innumerable water bodies in the country including doba, nala, tanks, ponds, beels, haors, rivers and canals. The environmental nature of the water bodies are of different types. So, methods of cultivation of fishes in these various types of water bodies are also different. It becomes possible to produce more fish by less expenditure if fish is cultured in appropriate method in accordance with the types of water bodies and the prevailing environmental situation in it. Different methods of fish cultivation are described here.

Cultivation of Fish in the Ponds

Basically, fish cultivation in our country means fish culture in the ponds. There are about 13 lacs of tanks and ponds in the country. Among them some may have water throughout the year and some may have water for few months of the year. The ponds which contain substantial amount of water throughout the year is known as permanent ponds. On the other hand, the ponds which contain sufficient quantity of water for months only and get dry in the winter and dry seasons are known as seasonal ponds.

Fig : 81 Fish species suitable for cultivation in ponds

All fish cannot be cultivated in all types of ponds. Rajputi, Nilotica, Shing, Magur, etc. may be cultivated in small and seasonal ponds. Galda shrimps may also be cultivated in seasonal and small ponds. Comparatively larger sized permanent ponds are more suitable for the cultivation of Ruhi, Katla, Mrigel, Silver carp, etc.

Page 174: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Different Methods of Fish Culture 169

Moreover all the ponds are required to be prepared before cultivation of fish. For this purpose, the pond is to be cleared from voracious fishes and other unwanted aquatic animals by drying the pond or using chemical poisons. After that measured amount of lime should be applied in the pond water. Fertilizers should be applied in the pond water after about five days of lime application, The natural food for fishes are produced in the pond after 5-7 days of fertilizer application. At this time correct fish species in correct proportions are to be released in the ponds. Fertilizers are required to be applied in the pond water regularly in order to ensure the continuous supply of natural food. The fertilizer should be applied up to the harvest time of the fishes in the pond. Supplementary foods also to be given along with fertilizer application for getting higher production from the pond. Netting in the pond is occassionally necessary to check the health and growth rates of the fishes.

Fish Culture in Cage

Culturing fish in the cage system in our country is a new system. In the water bodies where fish cultivation is not normally possible they may be cultivated by using the cage system. Fish may normally be cultivated by this system in the open water bodies, such as rivers, canals, haor, baor or similar type of bigger sized water bodies.

Preparation of the Cage

The cage may be prepared for fish culture by bamboo sticks, wood frame and nylon nets. It is better to use the cage which is five meters in length, three meters in width and two meters in depth. However, according to the depth of the available water and the species of fish to be cultivated, the size of the cage may be slightly smaller or bigger. The holes of the boundary net, hedge and other nets used in the cage should not exceed 0.5 cm. The lower part of the net may be kept free in open water and the upper part of the net may be tied with the rectangular bamboo frame. If it is fully prepared then the four corners of the net under water should be tied with four bamboo poles.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-22

Page 175: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

170 Agricultural Education

Fig : 82 Fish cultivation in cage

Fish Species to be Cultivated in Cage

The fish species to be cultivated in cage should be such so that they grow rapidly and takes all types of food. The fish suitable for cultivation in cage system are, namely Ruhi, Katla, Mrigel, Rajputi, Shing, Magur, etc. The optimum size of fish fries to be released in the cage should be 8-10 cm in length. Because the smaller fries may ship out through the holes in the net or may get stuck with the net while trying to cross the net. The rate for fry release may be several times higher which is required in case of the ponds. An average rate of fish fry release in cage culture is eight fries per cubic meter of water.

Supply of Food

The fish cultivation cages are set usually in flowing water streams and open water bodies. For this reason application of fertilizers for enhancing growth to natural food materials will have no effect. So, balanced food should be directly given to the net cage every day in specific amount. At first balanced food should be applied everyday at the rate of five per cent of the total weight of the fish released in the cage. After one month, food may be supplied at the rate of four per cent of the estimated stock fish weight. The total amount of calculated food may be applied at two times. First half in the morning and second half in the evening.

Harvesting of Fish

The fish cultured in net cage may grow rapidly and attain the marketable size within 5-6 months. After 5-6 months of releasing the fries, the bigger sized fish may be sold in the market and the same number of fish fries may be simultaneously released in the net cage.

Page 176: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Different Methods of Fish Culture 171

In this way, fish production in the country may rapidly be increased ensuring the use of open water body based net cage fish culture.

Fish Cultivation in Tank

The number of ponds and ditch, etc. are few in cities and towns. Moreover, on sufficient land is not available for new ponds. In this circumstances, fish culture in tanks may be encouraged in the urban areas. The size of a tank may be 10-15 square meters having a depth of about one meter where small scale fish may be cultivated. These fishes may be suitable for cultivation in tanks which have higher growth rate, eat supplemental food and can tolerate some unfavourable environment. According to the criteria mentioned above African Magur, Nilotika, Rajputi, Shing and Magur are the most suitable for cultivation in the tanks. As in net cage, more number of fish may be stocked in tanks. The cultivation of fish is solely dependent on the application of supplemental food in the tank. In a tank 5-10 fish fries may be stocked per cubic meter. In this case supplemental food may be given to the tank calculating both the quality and quantity of the food. If the food supply becomes deficit, then the growth of the fish get stopped. On the other hand, if the food supply is higher than the number of fishes, may die. They polluting the tank water. So, of excess found care should be taken to observe whether the fishes are taking food or not and food is becoming deficit or excess. The water in the tank should be occasionally changed to maintain the quality of water. This operation increases the oxygen content of the water and ensures rapid growth of the stock of fish.

Fish Cultivation in Rice Field

Rice is our principal crop. Rice is cultivated in about 75 per cent of the total agricultural land of the country throughout the year. Fish may be cultivated in medium low land and low land soils having ridge (ail) of earth around it. Cultivation of fish in rice field increases the yield of rice and additional income from the fishes obtained. The fishes like Rajputi, Nilotika, Common carp, shrimps, etc. may be cultured in rice fields. Grass carp should not be reared in rice field, because it may eat and destroy the rice seedlings.

Fish fries should be released in the rice field after 15-20 days of transplantation. In case of monoculture, 15-20 fish fries of any one of the Rajputi or Nilotica or common carp may be released per decimal of the rice field. The rice field selected for fish culture should be bound with a strong ridge of earth set up around and paralled drains

Page 177: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

172 Agricultural Education

should be made within the rice field. The depth of the drain should be 50 cm. The fish stays and moves in the drain and in the rice fields and take their food. When the water layer of the rice field reduces, then the fish takes shelter in the drains. The fish may be harvested from the drains in due time.

Fig : 83 Catching fish from rice field

There is no need for applying insecticides when fish is cultured in rice field. Occassionally cowdung may be applied in the field as fertilizer. There are many diversified sources of food for fish in rice fields. In case of the need for rapid growth of the fish, some rice bran may be applied in the field from time to time.

The following additional advantages may be obtained while culturing fish in rice fields.

1. Fish is harvested as an additional crop from the same piece of land along with rice production.

2. Fish helps in controlling weeds in rice field.

3. Fish eats many types of insect pests which are destructive to rice field.

4. Excreta of fish is useful as fertilizer for rice. As a result, yield of rice increases.

Integrated Fish Cultivation

When fish is cultured in a pond and livestock farming or crop cultivation is done on the bank of the pond, then the whole system is known as integrated fish cultivation.

Page 178: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Different Methods of Fish Culture 173

Poultry and ducks are reared in most of the rural houses of the country. Preparing a house above the pond water level or on the bank of the pond, fish can easily be cultivated in such an integrated system. The following spaces are required for rearing poultry in the house to be made.

Each duck 0.14 square meter

Each layer (poultry) 0.19 square meter

Each broiler (poultry) 0.14 square meter

The poultry house should be made at least one meter apart from the bank of the pond. As a result the poultry excreta and food wastes will fall from the floor of the house directly to the water even in the dry season when the water level get reduced. The distance between the top of the roof and the floor should be 1.25-1.50 meters. It is better to prepare the poultry house with sun grass or rice straw.

The Ponds are to be prepared before fish fry stocking in case of integrated fish culture. The process of preparing the pond is like general fish cultivation. Ruhi fish fries may be stocked in per bigha pond from 1000-1200 numbers. The size of the fries should be 8-10 cm in length. In case of poultry birds, 75 fowls or 60 ducks may be reared per bigha pond. No fertilizer is required to be applied in fish poultry integrated system farm. The excreta of the poultry birds acts as a good quality fertilizer for the fish. Moreover, many fishes take some part of the excreta directly as food. Supplementary foods are not applied in integrated fish poultry farms. As the house is prepared above the pond water, some of the food and food wastes directly fall into the pond water. Fish takes these wastes as food. So additional fertilizer or supplemental food are not required to be applied and no additional money is spent in this respect. More production is achieved with less expenditure in integrated fish farms.

Fig : 84 Fish poultry integrated farm

Page 179: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

174 Agricultural Education

Shrimp Cultivation in Gher The coastal saline water bodies of 4-5 acre size (one acre equal to 1200 square meters) are known as Ghers. Usually Bagda shrimp is cultivated in coastal Ghers. Before stocking shrimp fries, the Gher must be dried and prepared. Shrimp cultivation in Gher increases fertility. The voracious and other destructive and unwanted animals are eradicated. Under dry condition, lime is to be applied at the rate of one kg per decimal of land. After five days of lime application cowdung 7 kg, urea 75 grams, triple super phosphate 50 grams should be applied. The natural food for fish grows in the Gher within 5 to 7 days after fertilizer application. At this stage the Gher will be considered as ready for shrimp stocking. Normally, shrimps are released in the Gher in the months of Magh and Falgun. The number of shrimp fries may be released are 100-200 per decimal of the Gher. After stocking fertilizers should be applied regularly to encourage the growth of natural food. Organic manures should be preferably given to the shrimp Ghers. About one kg of cowdung may be applied mixing it with water per week per decimal of the Ghers. Supplementary food also should be supplied in the Gher along with fertilizers. There should be sluice gate in Gher for changing water. Shrimps usually take food at night. For this reason, supplemental food should be given in Gher in the evening. If foods are applied in the forenoon it may be lost and sometimes pollute the water undergoing decomposition. The food for shrimps may be prepared by mixing 20 per cent rice bran or wheat bran, 50 per cent mustered oil cake and 30 per cent snail flesh. If the food is prepared in the form of pellet then it can be easily taken up by the shrimps. The water of the Ghers should be changed in order to maintain the quality, salinity and environment of the Gher. Shrimps may attain the marketable size after 7-8 months of stocking when cultured properly. The production of shrimp is usually 8-10 kg per decimal of crop per season.

Fig : 85 Gher for shrimp cultivation

Page 180: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Different Methods of Fish Culture 175

Mixed Culture of Carp and Shrimps

Ruhi, Katla, Mrigel, etc. are the indigenous fishes of the carp group. The Silver carp, Grass carp, Common carp, etc. are the exotic fishes of the carp group. When Galda shrimp is monocultured, then the natural food of the upper layer and middle layer remains unused. If Ruhi and Katla are cultivated in mixed culture with Galda shrimp, then the food of all the layers of the ponds are equally utilized. This results in more production of fish. Mixed cultivation of Ruhi and Galda shrimp in pounds give maximum economic prfit per unit area of pond. The mixed culture method of Galda shrimp and Ruhi is briefly described here.

Selection of Pond

Appropriate ponds should be selected for the mixed culture of Galda shrimp and carp fishes. The selected pond should be such that it contains 1-15 meter depth water at least for six months of the year. A pond of 20-50 decimal is better for such a mixed fish culture. The ponds having loam, clay loam and sandy loam textured soils are better for the purpose.

Preparation of the Pond

The voracious and unwanted fishes and other animals should be removed from the pond at the first stage. The objective may be achieved by drying the pond or using chemical materials which is poisonous to fishes. However, complete drying of the pond is comparatively better. After the eradication of the voracious fishes, lime should be applied in the pond at the rate of one kg per decimal of pond area. The fertilizers to be applied 8-9 days after the allpication of lime. The fertilizers are :

Cowdung 10 kg

Urea 100 grams

Triple super phosphate 75 grams

When the colour of the pond water will become green to brownish after 6-7 days of fertilizer application then fish fries are to be stocked.

Harvesting and Transport of Fish Fries

The shrimp fries should be stocked in pond when it attain the size of 4-8 cm. The fries of Galda shrimp may be found naturally in rivers and coastal areas. Recently several shrimp hatcheries have been established in the southern area of Bangladesh which mainly produce Galda shrimps.

Page 181: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

176 Agricultural Education

From these sources Galda shrimp fries may be collected. As like Ruhi fish fries the Galda shrmp fries can not be transported putting them only in polyethylene bags. The Galda shrimp fries makes holes in the poly bag through their sharp rostrum. For this reason the shrimps are first to be put in a plastic net bag having small holes. Then a number of such small bags are to be put in a bigger size polyethylene bag.

Stocking Shrimp Fries

Shrimp stays and lives at the bottom layer of the ponds. For this reason the bottom fooder carp fishes, such as Mrigel, Carpio, Mirror carp, etc. should not be stocked with shrimps while mixed culturing of the shrimp and carps is done. In this case nine Silver carp, five Katla, Ruhi seven, Rajputi two, Grass carp one and 35-40 shrimp fries may be stocked per decimal of pond. The carp fries should be released after 5-7 days of stocking of the shrimp fries.

Application of Fertilizers

The natural food is produced in the pond by applying fertilizer to the pond water. After about 10 days of stocking fries one kg cowdung, 50 grams of urea and 35 grams of triple super phosphate should be applied every week per decimal of pond.

Fig : 86 Release of fish fry in the pond

Supplemental Food Application The growth of fish becomes satisfactory if supplemental food are applied along with fertilizer application. Supplemental food of fish may be prepared by mixing fish meal one part, wheat bran two parts, mustard oil cake three parts and rice bran four parts. The food should be applied to the pond water at the rate of 3-4 per cent of the stock weight every day.

Page 182: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Different Methods of Fish Culture 177

Fig : 87 Supply of food of fish

The carp fishes take food at day time. But shrimps take their food at night. For this reason, supplemental food for carps should be applied in the morning while shrimp food should be given in the evening. These food should be given in tray or earthen plate and left hanging at the bottom of the pond. The Galda shrimp takes these food with the help of a forcep like organ of the long legs. So, the food of shrimp is better if it is given in a pellet form or in nodule form. Snail flesh cutting into small pieces may be applied in the pond in order to enhance the growth of shrimps. It is to be observed regularly that whether the shrimps are taking food or not and thus amount of food may be increased or decreased according to need. Cultural Practices for Shrimps The shrimps change their shells or they molt at different stages of growth cycle. The branches of trees which do not pollute the pond water, such as date, palm, coconut, etc. should be given in the pond as shelter materials for shrimps. Sometimes a green colour layer may be created on the surface of the pond water. This type of green layers are harmful for shrimps. If green algae bloom become dense then fertilizer application may be stopped temporarily and thus the pond may be protected from such pollutions. Harvesting Fishes and Shrimps The fishes and shrimps may be suitable for marketing after 6-7 months of stocking. So, the big sized fishes and shrimps may be harvested by netting after 6-7 months of proper culture. As a result, the small fishes and shrimps will get a chance of getting bigger. If properly cultured, 12-14 kg of fishes and 3-4 kg shrimps may be produced per decimal of land in a season.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-23

Page 183: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

178 Agricultural Education

Practical

Title of the Experiment : Cultivation of Fish in Ponds

Materials

1. Pond

2. Chemicals for fish eradication

3. Lime

4. Fertilizer, organic manure, cowdung, inorganic fertilizer

a. Urea

b. Triple super phosphate

c. Muriate of potash

5. Fish fries

6. Supplemental food of fish

a. Rice bran

b. Wheat bran

c. Mustard oil cake

7. Fishing net

8. Weighing machine and scale, etc.

Steps of Work

1. If there is any pond in your school, then select it for cultivation of fish. If there is no pond, then select another pond nearby the school with the help of class teacher.

2. Eradicate the voracious and other unwanted fishes and animal drying the pond by applying poisonous chemicals if it is of perennial in nature. Shol, Boal, Taki, etc. are the voracious type of fishes. The smaller fishes other than the stocked species are the unwanted fishes. The appropriate time for drying the pond is the months of Falgun and Chaitra. Reconstruct the bank of the pond if there is any breach on it. The fish fries may be stocked after 15 days if fishes are killed by medicine.

Page 184: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Different Methods of Fish Culture 179

3. Measure the length and width of the pond and calculate the total area of the pond and pond water. Apply lime on the basis of that calculation. Apply organic and inorganic fertilizers after 8-10 days of lime application.

4. Lime should be applied after 7-10 days of drying the pond or killing the fishes by chemicals.

5. Test the natural food growth in the water after 5-7 days of fertilizer application. The water may be teasted by dipping the hand up to the elbow. If the hand paw can not be seen at this level, then it is to be understood that sufficient natural food have grown in the pond. At this stage, the fish fries may be stocked.

6. Organic manure and inorganic fertilizer may be applied in the pond regularly after stocking the fish fries. The fertilizers other than urea should be dissolved in water in a pot over night. Next day morning mix the urea with the dissolved fertilizers and broadcast on the surface of the water.

7. Apply supplemental food every day to the pond at the rate of 3-4 per cent of the stock weight. Determine the average weight of fish by harvesting 20-25 fishes of different species by netting. From this average weight calculate the weight of the total number of fish fries stocked. If the total weight of fish in found to be 100 kg then 3-4 kg food should be applied every day. The stock weight of the pond should be determined in 20-25 days interval and based on the quantity of food to be applied should be determined.

8. Test the fish whether it is taking the supplied food or not. The quantity of food should be increased or decreased accordingly.

9. The amount of fertilizers and supplemental food should be reduced to some extent during the winter season.

10. Sale the bigger fishes in the market after 6-7 months of stocking and again release same number of fish fries as the number of fishes harvested.

11. Calculate the cost and economic benefit of fish pond at the end of the year.

Special Note

Mind that cultivation of fish in a pond is the sum of different technical, cultural and management activities throughout the year. So, in order to get satisfactory yields, the daily and monthly activities should be performed in right way and in right time.

Page 185: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

180 Agricultural Education

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. When food should be applied to the fish cultured in the cage?

a. Morning and evening b. Morning and at night

c. Morning and at noon d. Morning and afternoon

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 2 & 3.

Recently production of galda shrimp fries is commenced in some farm. Rahim bought some shrimp fries from those farm and though he collected these fries in polythin bag with sufficient oxygen even then almost all the fries died.

2. Shrimp fries of Rahim Mia died, because of

a. excessive oxygen

b. water going out of the bag through the holes in polythin bag.

c. died out of shaking

d. polluted wated

3. Where from Rahim could collect galda shrimp fries other than the farm?

i. from the river

ii. from the shore

iii. from the western part of Bangladesh

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i & iii

Page 186: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Different Methods of Fish Culture 181

Creative Questions (CQ)

Figure

a. What type of culture was shown in the figure?

b. Why in this system the house is required to be made 1m away from the bank of the pond?

c. Determine the number of fish and duck (with species) for a pond of area 10 decimal for culture.

d. “The culture shown in figure can play an important role in removing the unemployment problem in Bangladesh” Judge the genuineness of the statement.

Page 187: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 3

Mixed Culture of Carp Fishes

Ruhi, Katla, Mrigel, Kalbaus, Ghania, Sarputi, etc. are commonly grouped into carp fishes. A number of carp fishes have been imported from foreign countries for cultivation in ponds of our country. For example, Silver carp, Gras carp, Big head carp, Common carp and Rajputi. These fish species have been found to be very suitable for cultivation in our country. These carps live in different layers of the pond and take food from different depths of the water. Carp fishes usually do not compete with food of fishes staying and living at different layers. Supplemental food such as rice bran, wheat bran, mustard oil cake, green grass, vegetables, etc. are easily eaten by the carps along with natural food grown in pond water. Thus when the indigenous and exotic carps are cultivated in a mixed population then more economic benefit may be obtained.

Cutivation of fish includes production of more fishes through improved technologies and managements than the fishes usually grown under natural condition in a water body. The mixed culture of fishes may be defined as the simultaneous cultivation of different species of fish in the same pond at the same time. The potential food supplying capacity of different layers of a pond are comparatively fully utilized by the mixed culture. As a result higher production is achieved. The method of mixed cultivation of fishes are described in this section briefly.

The Ponds Suitable for Carp Fish Culture

The size of the pond suitable for carp fish cultivation should be between 1200-4000 square meters (one acre). The bank of the pond should be raised in such a way that it is not flooded during rainy season. The pond should be situated in such a place that it can receive optimum sunshine during day time. The depth of water controls the quality of pond water in many ways. If the depth of the pond water is more, then the sun rays can not reach the bottom of the pond. Such a situation causes deterioration of the quality of water and natural foods do not grow in the lower layers. On the other hand, if the depth is low the temperature of the water rises and excess vegetation at the

Page 188: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Mixed Culture of Carp Fishes 183

bottom of the pond may result. It hampers the normal life process of the fishes. So, the depth of pond water should be minimum 1.2 meters in dry season and maximum 2.5 meters in the rainy season.

The ponds situated in the area where the soil texture is clay red soils, the water of those ponds are usually turbid. The sunshine can not enter to a deep layer when the water becomes turbid. This results in lower production of fish in such ponds. The ponds having loamy textured soils are most suitable for fish cultivation.

Carp fishes may attain the marketable size within one year of stocking. So, the ponds for permanent carp cultivation should be selected considering the important criteria mentioned above.

Preparation of the Pond

The success of fish cultivation depends on the preparation of the pond in many ways. The following step-wise works should be performed while preparing of a pond for fish cultivation.

Reclamation or reconstruction of the Pond : Poisonous gases, harmful bacteria and insect pests may be present in a pond if there remains excess muds at the bottom of the pond. For this reason such ponds should be at first dried and the excess mud should be removed. The bank of the pond should be reconstructed if there is any breach over there. The aquatic weeds of the pond should be removed. If the pond is not dried, the weeds of the pond should be removed by using manual labours.

Eradication of voracious fishes : The voracious and unwanted fishes and old animals may be eradicated from the pond either by drying the pond or using chemical poison to fishes. The voracious fishes may be controlled by using a chemical which is known as Rotenon. About 125 grams of Rotenon is required to be applied for one meter depth of per decimal pond water. The voracious and unwanted small fishes may also be eradicated by frequent netting of the pond, if the water content of the pond is lower.

Application of lime : Application of lime is must for successful production of fish in the pond. Lime purifies the pond water and also increases the fertility of the soil and water of the pond. Usually lime is applied at the rate of one kg lime per decimal of pond (40 square meters). The measured amount of lime is first moistured with water and then cooled. The lime is uniformly broadeast in the pond. Lime stones are found to be more effective than powdered ordinary lime. The rate of lime application may slightly be higher or lower according to the nature of the pond soil. About two kg of lime should be given in the ponds situated in the red soil area.

Page 189: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

184 Agricultural Education

Application of fertilizers : The fertilizers should be applied after 8-10 days of lime application. The following fertilizers may be applied per decimal of pond water.

Cowdung 5 kg

Urea 500 grams

Triple super phosphate 50 grams

Muriate of potash 25 grams

According to the size of the pond, measured amount of fertilizers should be moistened with water and then broadcast over the pond water. Natural foods grow in the pond water after application of the fertilizers.

Testing fish food in the pond water : The green algae and other zoo planktons normally start growing after 4-5 days of fertilizer application. These biomass growth gives the water a green to a brownish colour. The algae and zoo planktons are the natural foods of fishes.

For testing, some amount of the pond water should be taken in a clear glass 4-5 days after fertilizer application. Then the water of the glass should be seen against sun light. If greenish or brownish granules are seen in the glass water then it is to be understood that natural food have been grown in the pond and it is the time for stocking fish fries in it. If the water of the pond do not become green to brownish, then additional 100 grams urea and 100 grams triple super phosphate should be applied per decimal of the ponds.

Collection of fish fries : In most of the districts of Bangladesh there are government and private fish hatcheries. Fries of different fishes are found in these hatcheries or nurseries. The death rate of smaller fries in higher. Usually healthy fries of fishes measuring 8-12 cm should be stocked in the ponds. The fish fries are mainly available in the months from Baishakh to Kartic. Healthy fish fry is a precondition to higher production. The size of different species of fish fries should be equal while stocking.

Fig: 88 Testing natural food of fish in water

Page 190: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Mixed Culture of Carp Fishes 185

Transport of fish fries : The fish fries may be transported in polythyene bag, aluminium or earthen pots. Short distance transport of fish fries may be done putting it in earthen or aluminum containers. For a long distant transport of fish fries, it may be carried in polyethylene bags with oxygen supply. The fish fry containers/bags should be kept in shade. While carried in container, the water of the container should be frequently shaken. Otherwise the fish fries may die suffering from oxygen deficiency. Arrangement should also be made so that temperature of the container water can not be higher.

Releasing fish fries : The fish fries brought from fish nurseries should not be directly released to the stocking pond. It may cause death of the fish fries due to the variation of temperature of the container water and the pond water. At first the fish fry polybag or the container should be floated over the pond water for about 15-20 minutes. At this time water of the pond should be given in the container in small lots. This operation will gradually equalize the temperature of the container water and the temperature of the pond water.

Fig: 89 The method of releasing fish fries

After that the polybag or the container of water should be gradually poured into the pond water slanting it slowly, and the fish fries will thus be released into the pond water.

The stocking rate of fish fries : The potential food supplying capacity of the upper, middle and bottom layers are not the same for all ponds. The habitat for all fish species are also not the same. So if a single species of carp is stocked in a pond the higher production may not be obtained. Mixed culture of carp fishes is better for getting higher yields. The different fish species are required to be stocked in specific numbers. Use of six species of carp in the mixed cultivation system results good harvest of fishes.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII- Forma-24

Page 191: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

186 Agricultural Education

The numbers and proportions of carp species to be selected depend on the cultivation systems and available management facilities. Under normal conditions 35 numbers of different carp species may be stocked per decimal of the ponds. The total number of fish fries may be slightly increased if the supply of balanced food and improved management practices are ensured. The specifications of fish fry stocking according to water layer of the pond and type of fish species are given in the following picture (next page).

Katla 6 number

Upper layer 16 number

Silver carp 10 number

Middle layer 7 number

Ruhi 7 numb er

Mrigel 4 number

Bottom Layer 8 number Mirror carp/common carp

4number

Grass Carp 4 number

Other 4 number

Puti 3 number

Total 35 number

Fig: 90 Number of fish fries (35 number) based on species for a pond of 40 squares meters

Cultural Practices After Fish Fry Stocking The following points should carefully be followed if higher production of fish is to be achieved after stocking fish fry in a pond. 1. Regular application of fertilizers is to be ensured for the production of natural foods in

the pond water. 2. Supplemental foods are to be applied to enhance the rapid growth of the fishes.

3. The hygienic environment of the should always be maintained by applying lime in it.

Page 192: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Mixed Culture of Carp Fishes 187

1. Application of Fertilizers

Fertilizers are to be applied every day or every week after stocking fish fries in the pond. Application of fertilizer is good for higher production if it is done every day. Costs may also be reduced in this way of fertilizer application. The following fertilizers may be applied per day per decimal of the ponds.

Cow dung 150 grams

Urea 5 grams

Triple super phosphate 3 grams

The weekly rates of fertilizer application per decimal of the ponds may be :

Cow dung 2 kg

Urea 50 grams

Triple super phosphate 30 grams

The fertilizers other than urea after should first be moistened in a pot for 12-15 hours. Next day the fertilizers should be mixed with the measured urea any applied to the pond water. The amount of fertilizers to be applied in a pond also depend on the transparency of the water. In a shiny day at noon time, if the palm is seen when dipped up to the elbow, then fertilizers should be applied regularly. If the palm can not be seen, then fertilizer application rate should be reduced. If the water of the pond is more clear, that is the palm is seen when dipped more than the elbow, then the amount of fertilizers should be increased accordingly. The fertilizers should be applied in the pond in the morning.

2. Application of Supplementary Food

Only the natural food can not ensure satisfactory fish production. The full nutrition of the fish still can not be achieved by applying fertilizers which enhance natural food growth. Supplemental food must be applied every day in the pond to ensure higher production. For the purpose 30-40 fishes may be caught from the pond and its average weight should be determined. Thus the approximate total weight of the stocked fish is to be determined. The supplementary food will amount to 2-3 per cent of the fish stock weight of the pond. For example, if the total weight of a fish stock is 100 kg then 2-3 kg of supplementary food should be applied every day in that pond. Equal amounts of rice bran, wheat bran, mustard oil eake may be mixed to prepare the food of carp fishes.

Page 193: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

188 Agricultural Education

Fig: 91 Supplementary food are being given

The mustard oil cake to be used in the food should be kept moist in water for about 12 hours. Moist mustard oil cake, rice and wheat brans should be uniformly mixed and it may be applied to the pond giving it a shape of small balls. The required and measured whole food may be divided into two parts. One part may be given in the morning and the rest portion should be given in the evening. The supplemental food should be applied at a particular time in a particular site of the pond. This has been found suitable for taking food by the fish.

3. Application of Lime

Many harmful gases may be formed in muds at the bottom of the ponds and pathogenic organisms in the pond water. The water of the ponds may be turbid in many cases. This type of pond and pond water are not suitable for fish cultivation. Such pond water may be reclaimed by the use of lime in appropriate method.

Lime reclaims the water of ponds, destroys the harmful insect pests and pathogenic microorganisms, removes poisonous gases from the bottom of the pond. Lime should be applied in the pond in the months of October and November or 4-5 months after stocking of the fish fries. The rate of lime application is one kg per decimal of the ponds.

Methods of Keeping Hygienic Condition in the Pond

Green algae are the natural food of fish in the ponds. But its excess growth is harmful for the cultivation of fish. The excess growth of algae and its thick layer formation is

Page 194: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Mixed Culture of Carp Fishes 189

known as bloom. The colour of the bloom may be green, blue green, brown or redish brown. Excess algae bloom eteriorates the quality of pond water, reduces the oxygen content of the water and may cause death of the fish causing respiratory troubles blocking the gills of the fish. These cause serious disturbance in the life process of the fishes. The algae bloom may be grown in pond water due to excess use of urea and triple super phosphate. Successful fish production needs appropriate control of such bloom in the water of the ponds.

Copper sulphate at the rate of 35 grams for one meter average depth of per decimal pond may successfully be applied for eradicating algae bloom. The measured amount of copper sulphate should be dissolved in small amount of water and should be spread over the pond water. Within 2-3 days of copper sulphate application the alga bloom will be removed and the water will be cleaned.

Besides alga blooms other aquatic weeds may create hazard in fish cultivation. Aquatic weeds hamper the entrance of sunshine and thus reduce the growth of natural foods. Densely growing aquatic weeds give shelter to the voracious fishes and other harmful aquatic animals. The floating weeds in a pond may be cleaned manually by physical labour. If there is any submerged weeds, the stocking of Grass carp and Rajputi fishes help to control them by direct eating.

Muddy water of pond : Muddy or turbid water when present in a pond reduces fish production. The growth and production of natural food in turbid water is low and fish faces troubles to respire in turbid water. The turbidity of pond water may be reduced by applying alum in the pond in very small amount. The water quality of such pond may also be improved by applying 35 to 50 grams fo potassium permanganet per meter average depth of water per decimal of pond.

Maintaing the Level of Oxygen

Oxygen is essential for all lives and life processes. The amount of oxygen released by algae and aquatic green plants during photosynthesis are dissolved in water. Some amount of oxygen is also dissolved in water directly from the atmospheric air. The fishes and other aquatic plants and animals perform respiration by this dissoloved oygen. In absence of sunshine no oxygen is produced at night. Morover oxygen is also utilized in the oxidative decomposition process of prganic materials at the bottom of the pond. For this reason, the oxygen content of pond water remains in its minimum level in the morning and becomes maximum in the evening.

Page 195: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

190 Agricultural Education

A sufficient oxygen content of pond water is a must for carrying the life processes or production activities in a pond. If the oxygen content of water goes below two milligrams per litre water, then Ruhi carps can not live in that water. An oxygen content of 5-8 milligrams per litre of water is ideal for fish production. If the fishes of a pond get surfaced or float on the water and show humming symptoms in the morning specially in the cloudy days, then it is to be clearly understood that oxygen has become seriously deficient. Under such a condition, oxygen content of the water should be increased by giving irrigation water to the affected pond. If the fishes of the pond start dying due to shortage of oxygen, then 5-10 kg of triple super phosphate per acre may be applied in the pond in the morning at 8:00 to 9:00 am. This will increase the photosynthetic rates of phytoplanktons. It also results in the reduction of carbon di-oxide and proportionately increases the concentration of oxygen. Oxygen deficiency may also be developed from the intensive decomposition of organic materials at the bottom of the pond. The range of oxygen content may be maintained by keeping aquatic environment neat and clean. Maintaining Acidity and Alkalinity of Pond Water The acidity or alkalinity of pond is expressed by pH. If the pH of a water is 7.00 then its reaction is neutral. if the pH value is dropped below 7.00 then its acidity accordingly starts to increase. If the pH of a water starts rising from 7.00 then it indicates that the alkalinity of the water is incereasing. A pH range from 6.5-8.5 is suitable for the growth of natural food in pond water. Continuous application of chemical fertilizers causes the increase of acidity or decrease of alkalinity of the pond water. On the other hand, the acidity of water may also increase with the rapidity of organic matter decomposition. Application of lime in appropriate amount decreases the acidity of pond water and thus the alkalinity reaches the expected favourable range. For this reason lime should be applied in pond at the rate of one kg per decimal of pond at an interval of 4-5 months. The important steps for maintaining the pH of pond water is that the excess mud staying in the bottom of the land should be removed and there should not be any mass decomposition of organic matter in the pond. Thus the acidity or alkalinity of the Continuous application of chemical fertilizers causes the increase of acidity or decrease of alkalinity of the pond water. On the other hand, the acidity of water may also increase with the rapidity of organic matter decomposition. Application of lime in appropriate amount decreases the acidity of pond water and thus the alkalinity reaches the expected favourable range. For this reason lime should be applied in pond at the rate of one kg per decimal of pond at an interval of 4-5 months. The important steps for maintaining the pH of pond water is that the excess mud staying in the bottom of the land should be removed and there should not be any mass decomposition of organic matter in the pond. Thus the acidity or alkalinity of the pond water may be maintained by keeping the environment of the pond neat and clean.

Page 196: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Mixed Culture of Carp Fishes 191

Observation of Fish Health and its Growth Rate The growth rate, health, presence of diseases, etc. of the fishes of the pond should be observed by netting at least once a month. The main characteristics of a healthy stout fish are mentioned below : 1. The body of the fish is strong and stout. 2. The size of the head and the body is proportionate. 3. The colour of the body is naturally bright. 4. Some slippery materials will remain on the surface of body of the fishes. 5. There will be no symptom of ulcers or infectious spots on the body. 6. The fins of the fish will appear normal.

Fig: 92 Examining the health of fishes

If there is any deviation of the normal symptoms mentioned above, it is to be understood that some disturbances have occurred. In case of any difficulty or abnormal symptoms the technical management taken in turns and the food and fertilizer application should be reviewed and necessary measures should be taken. If necrotic spots are seen on the body of the fishes then lime should be applied in the pond water. If the growth rate of fishes found to be lower then the quantity of If there is any deviation of the normal symptoms mentioned above, it is to be understood that some disturbances have occurred. In case of any difficulty or abnormal symptoms the technical management taken in turns and the food and fertilizer application should be reviewed and necessary measures should be taken. If necrotic spots are seen on the body of the fishes then lime should be applied in the pond water. If the growth rate of fishes found to be lower then the quantity of supplementary food should be increased. The fishes caught to test the presence of diseases should be again released to the pond water after soaking it in potassium permanganate solution.

Page 197: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

192 Agricultural Education

Fish Harvesting, Production and Marketing

Fish harvesting and its marketing are very important steps of fish cultivation.

Fish Harvesting

Harvesting of fish in the right time is an important technique of getting higher yield from fish cultivation. The carp fishes usually grow very rapidly up to one year of age. After that, its growth rate comparatively reduces though food in take increases. For this reason, it is very important to harvest the pond fishes at the right time. Ruhi and Mirgel fishes may grow up to 700 grams to one kg in a period of 8-12 months. Silver carp, Katla, Grass carp may attain a weight of 1-1.5 kg in a poriod of 6-7 months. The weight of Rajputi may reach 150-200 grams in a period of 4-5 months. The weight range of the carp fishes as mentioned above have both higher demand and atractive prices in the market. Thus the bigger sized fishes of the pond should be harvested and marketed after 6-7 months of fish fry stocking. At the same time equal number of fish fish fries of those harvested species should be stocked in the pond. These practices help to get more production from a pond.

Production

If fish cultivation methods mentioned above are followed, 25-30 kg of carp fishes may be produced per decimal of pond in a year. If more improved and intersive cultural practices in fish cultivation is followed then it is possible to get more and more yield.

Marketing of Fish

Fish is perishable item. Rottening of fish starts just after its harvest, that is when the fishes are taken out of water. The rottening process is more rapid in the summer season. The fishes remain fresh if ice is given on the body of the fish after its harvest. Both the demand and price of fresh fishes are higher. In places where ice is not available, the times of harvest and market sale should be adjusted in such a manner Fish is perishable item. Rottening of fish starts just after its harvest, that is when the fishes are taken out of water. The rottening process is more rapid in the summer season. The fishes remain fresh if ice is given on the body of the fish after its harvest. Both the demand and price of fresh fishes are higher. In places where ice is not available, the times of harvest and market sale should be adjusted in such a manner that scope of rottening of the fishes in minimum. This ensures the maintenance of quality and higher prices from fish sales.

Page 198: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Mixed Culture of Carp Fishes 193

Practical

1. Title of the Experiment : Determination of the Area of Pond and Quantity of Inputs to be Used

Concept

The length of a stocking pond is 40 meters, width is 20 meters and the depth is 2 meters. Determine the area of the pond (in decimal). Determine also the quantities of inputs given below to be used for preparation of the pond. The inputs are :

1. Area of the pond (in decimal)

2. Quantity of lime

3. Quantity of urea

4. Quantity of Rotenon

Given : One decimal = 40 square meters

Urea = 125 grams (per decimal area of the pond)

Lime = 1 kg (per decimal area of the pond)

Rotenon = 75 grams (per one meter depth and per decimal area of the pond)

2. Title of the Experiment : Determining the Quality of water observing its colour

Materials

1. White bottle 1 (1 litre volume)

2. Magnifying glass 1 (medium size)

3. Glass (transparent) 1 (medium size)

4. Test tube 2 (big size)

Work Process

1. Collect some water from a tank or a pond in a clear bottle.

2. Take some water in a transparent glass from the bottle. Hold the glass against sunshine and observe the presence and movement of plankton and evaluate the water in respect to its fertility.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-25

Page 199: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

194 Agricultural Education

A. If the colour of the water is green ⎯ Very good fertile

B. If the water is clear or transparent ⎯ Not fertile

C. If the colour of the water is light green ⎯ Medium fertile

3. Observe whether the plankton move in the glass water or not.

4. Test the water of the glass for acidity using a litmass pager.

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ)

1. How much copper sulphate to be applied for eradicating algal bloom in a pond of average depth 1m?

a. 15 gm b. 25 gm

c. 35 gm d. 45 gm

Read the following paragraph and answer question Nos. 2 & 3.

Rezaul applied fertilizer in his pond and after 5 days he filled some pond water into a transparent bottle. Then he examined the colour of the water facing the sun. At this he could realize that natural food for fish was prepared in the water.

2. How could Rezaul realize that natural food was prepared in the pond water?

a. The colour of pond water became red.

b. The colour of pond water became light green

c. The colour of pond water became muddy.

d. The colour of pond water became transparent.

3. Since the colour of water in Razaul’s pond is transparent, what range of fertilizer to be applied to the pond water for good preparation of fish food?

a. As usual b. A bit more

c. A bit less d. Stop for the time being

Page 200: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Mixed Culture of Carp Fishes 195

Creative question (CQ)

1. Rezaul began mixed culture of carp fishes in his own 3 ponds. He prepared the pond in a befitting manner and stocked selected number and quantity of fish fries, After stocking fish fries, thouh he applied fertilizer and supplied supplementary food to the pond, but even then he found that the fish production was not up to the mark. Under this circumstance he sought the protection of local fishery officer who after examining the ponds advised him to apply lime. At the end of the year Rezaul’s pisciculture became profitable.

a. What is the mixed culture of carp fishes?

b. What do you understand by the selected number and quantity of fish fries in a pond?

c. Why did the fishery officer advised Rezaul to apply lime in his pond?

d. What role can be palyed to increase the alertness of his local people by the suitable methods op pisciculture adopted by Rezaul-explain.

Page 201: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section-4

Diseases of Fish and its Remedies

Every life is known to be attacked by some diseases. Fish is not an exception to this phenomena. Occurrence of diseases is a major problem in fish cultivation. The qualities of water and soils of water bodies deteriorate due to many reasons. It results in the hampering of the normal environment of water bodies. Deterioration of the quality of water body environment seriously hampers the normal life of fishes. But such an environment is very favourable for the growth and activity of pathogenic microorganisms and parasites. Under unfavourable environment the fishes are infested by pathogens and parasites as a result of fish-pathozen opposite reactions and relations. This causes diseases to fishes.

Causes of diseases in Fish

Fishes may be attacked by diseases due to many reasons. The major reasons of fish diseases are described here briefly.

1. Pathogenic micro-organisms, for example bacteria, virus and fungal infestations.

2. Parasites, for example mites, worms, atuli, etc attack.

3. Change of water quality.

4. Stocking of fish fries in excessive number.

5. Deficit of fish food.

6. Use of fertilizers in excess quantities.

7. Pollution of water bodies.

Fig: 93 Examination of fish pathogenic microorganisms under microscope

Page 202: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Diseases of Fish and its Remedies 197

Symptoms of Diseased Fish

In order to identify a diseased fish, the normal characters of a fish should be known at first. A normal healthy fish has a proportionate head and body

characteristic. The colour of the body is bright, slippery and the fins of the fishes seem to be normal. The major symptoms of a diseased fish are :

⎯ The normal brightness of the colour is destroyed.

⎯ The fish runs here and there.

⎯ Swims very slowly near to the water surface level or floats on the surface of pond water.

⎯ The fish hums on the surface of water.

⎯ The head looks larger than the body disproportionately.

⎯ Breaking or rottening of the fins.

⎯ Necrotic symptoms on the skin.

⎯ Outward exposition of the eyes.

⎯ Necrosis on skin, fins or gills or presence of parasites physically.

⎯ Reducation of fish physically or swelling of the body.

⎯ Loss of the balance of the body.

⎯ Coming out of scales.

Major Diseases of Fish

One cannot get good harvest of fishes when it is attacked by diseases. Much care should be taken in controlling fish health and diseases if higher production is expected. The major diseases of fish growing in sweet water are mentioned below :

1. Rottening of fish

2. Necrosis of fish

3. Fish mites

Page 203: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

198 Agricultural Education

The external symptoms, spread of diseases, prevention and remedial measures of major diseases of fishes are briefly described here.

Rottening Disease

Fishes are usually attacked by three types of rottening diseases. The diseases are :

1. Gill rot disease

2. Fin rot disease

3. Tail rot disease

1. Gill rot Disease

Gill rot disease of fish is a fungal disease. The name of the fungus is Bronchyomysis. The fungus enters into the gill of the fish and stops the blood circulation within the gill. As a result the oxygen supply in the organ's external part is stopped.

Symptoms of the disease : Rottening starts in the gill and the infected place gradually detached and break down. The affected fish can not perform normal respiration. As a result, the fish finally dies due to lack of respiration.

Fig: 94 A fish (head) affected by gill rot disease

Spread of the disease : The ponds having excess mud at the bottom and also having decomposition of excess organic material favours rapid spread of the disease.

Prevention of the disease : The disease may be prevented by the following cultural practices :

1. The excess mud present at the bottom of the pond should be removed while preparing the pond for fish cultivation.

2. Organic matter should not be allowed to accumulate in the pond.

3. Sufficient amount of lime should be applied during preparation of the pond.

Page 204: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Diseases of Fish and its Remedies 199

Remedies of the disease : Following remedial measures should be adopted to control the disease.

1. Changing the water of the infected pond reduces the intensity of the disease.

2. Mixing five milligrams of copper sulphate solution in a litre of water should be prepared. Then the diseased fish may be stocked into this solution for five minutes and again should be released to the water.

3. Lime should be applied to the pond. Application of fertilizers and food supply should be stopped temporarily.

2. Fin Rot Disease

Fin rot disease is a bacterial disease of fish.

Symptoms of the disease : Whitish spots are found on the surface of the fish. The fin membranes are broken and gradually decayed. The fish cannot move normally. The colour of the fish becomes dull.

Fig: 95 A fish infected with fin rot disease

Spread of the disease : The disease is found to spread rapidly in ponds having excess amount of decomposable organic matter.

Prevention of the disease : The disease my be prevented by applying one kg lime and one kg common salt per decimal of the pond in the forenoon time.

Remedies of the disease : The disease may be conrolled by the following practices :

1. The infected fins should be removed by cutting and the fish should be washed in a 2.5 per cent common salt solution, or

2. The infected fish should be soaked for one minute in a solution prepared by dissolving 0.5 grams of copper sulphate in one litre of water and then released in the pond water.

3. Tail Rot Disease

The tail rot disease of fish is a bacterial disease.

Symptoms of the disease : At first whitish spots are found to form on the tail and base of the tail. The tail fin gradually decayed and detached from the body. The fish looses its balance of the body during movement, Finally the fish dies.

Page 205: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

200 Agricultural Education

Spread of the disease : The tail rot disease has been found to spread rapidly if the pond contains excess mud in the bottom.

Prevention and remedies of the disease : The prevention and remedies of the disease is as like as that of fin rot disease of fishes.

Necrosis or Spot Disease

The necrotic disease of fishes is first caused due to the infection of a virus. In the later stage, secondary infection is caused by bacteria and fungi. The disease is found to occur in the unfavourable environment of the water bodies. It is a serious infectious disease.

Symptoms of the disease : At first small round red spots are found to be formed on the body of the fish. These red spots gradually become bigger and coalesce to form necrotic spots. The disease spreads very rapidly. The infected fish inactivly floats on the surface of water and move very slowly. The tail of the diseased fish becomes decayed and detached from the body. The other organs of the body rotten gradually and the fish becomes full of bad odour. The infected fish dies within 10-15 days from the attack.

Spread of the disease : The disease spreads rapidly with the onset of winter season. The disease occurs when the temperature is lower, acidity increases and the alkalinity of the pond water decreases.

Fig: 97 Fishes infected with necrotic or spot disease

Page 206: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Diseases of Fish and its Remedies 201

Prevention of the disease : The disease may be prevented by the following cultural practices :

1. The environment in the water body should be kept free of pollution.

2. Appropriate amount of lime should be applied at the time of pond preparation. The fish fries before stocking should be washed with salt solution.

3. The infected fish should be caught and destroyed putting it under soil.

Remedies of the disease : The disease can be cured by the following measures :

1. One kg of common salt should be applied per decimal area of the infected pond, or

2. The fish fries may be stocked soaking it for 15 minutes in five parts per million malachite solution, or

3. The fish may be given food at the rate of 75 milligrams terramycin along with per kg food.

Fish Parasites

Mites are serious parasites of fish disease. A parasite called argulus is responsible for this disease. Argulus is an external parasite, oval in shape and can not be seen normally by nacked eyes. This argulus parasite sucks blood from the body of the fish through suckers. They get fixed on the surface of the body and thus suck blood.

Symptoms of the disease : Argulus creates necrotic spots on the body of the fish. Infested fishes show abnormal movements. The fish rubs its body frequently with some hard surfaces.

Fig: 98 A fish infested by argulus parasite

Spread of the disease : The parasite spreads very rapidly when the ponds have thick layer of muds and organic materials at the bottom. The unhygienic environment of the ponds are very favourable for the spread of argulus in pond fishes.

Page 207: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

202 Agricultural Education Prevention of the disease : The environment of the pond should be kept neat and clean.

Remedies of the disease : The remedial measures of the disease are as follows :

1. Dipterex insecticide at the rate of 40 grams per meter depth and per decimal of the pond should be applied in the infected pond. Dipterex should be applied two times at an interval of seven days, or

2. The infected fish may be soaked in 15-20 parts per million solution of formalin and again should be released in the pond.

Practical

Title of the Experiment : Identification of Various Diseased Fishes

Materials

1. Healthy and stout fish

2. Diseased fish (specific disease)

3. Normal laboratory tray ⎯ 3 (medium size)

4. Forcep ⎯ 2(ordinary)

5. Magnifying glass (medium size)

6. Pencil and eraser

7. Scale

8. Practical note book.

Work Process

1. Collect some healthy stout fishes and some diseased fishes of different species with the help of the class teacher.

2. Considering the characteristics and symptoms, separate the healthy and diseased fishes through observation and discussion.

3. Keep the healthy fish and diseased fish in two separate trays.

4. Draw the figures of healthy and the diseased fish. 5. Write down the characteristics and symptoms of the healthy fishes and the diseased fishes

in the practical note book.

Page 208: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Diseases of Fish and its Remedies 203 6. Identify the names of the diseases consulting with the description of fish pathology given

in this section. 7. Examine the disease symptoms by the magnifying glass as and when necessary. 8. Separate all the fishes infected with specific diseases and write down the names and

symptoms in the practical note book clearly.

Exercise

Multiple Choice Questions (MCQ)

1. What is the cause of breaking out of gill rot disease of fish?

a. Infestation of bacteria b. Attack by parasite

c. Fungal infestation d. Viral infestation.

2. How do fish mites cause harm to fish?

a. Suck blood by being attached to the fin.

b. Enters into the head and such blood from brain of fish.

c. Suck blood from intestine by perforating the belly.

d. Suck blood by being attached to the eye.

3. Fishes attacked with fin rot disease are to be released to the pond after-

i soaking in formalin solution

ii. washing in common salt solution

iii. soaking in copper sulphate solution

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 4,5 and 6.

Karim Mia cultivates Rui, Katla fishes in his pond. He fixed up his daughter’s marriage. He

caught some fish from the pond to feed the guest on the marriage day. He observed the some

red round spots developed in the body of some fishes. Seeing this he took advice from the

fishery specialist.

Page 209: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

204 Agricultural Education

4. In which season the problem in Karim Mia’s pond is more?

a. Summer Season. b. Rainy Season.

c. Winter Season. d. Spring Season.

5. The cause of breaking out of the rot disease of fish is-

i. increase of acidity in water.

ii. decrease of basicity in water.

iii. more accumulation of mud in the pond.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii.

6. What did the specialist advise Karim Mia?

a. Potash to be applied to the water regularly.

b. The pond is to be kept pollution free.

c. Excessive fertilizer to be applied

d. Excessive organic substance to be allowed to accumulate.

Creative Question (CQ)

Fig-A Fig-B

a. In which disease the fish shown in fig-A is attacked with? b. Describe one symptom of the disease suffered by the fish shown in fig-B. c. How the disease of the fishes shown in fig-A and fig-B can be remedied. d. Analyze the dreadfulness of the two diseases of fishes shown in the

figures.

Page 210: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Chapter Five Forestry

Section-1 Importance of Trees

Introduction

The contribution of trees and plant in the daily life of human being are numerous. A number of such contributions may directly be measured. For example, timber wood, fuel wood, fruits and vegetables, medicinal and pharmaceuticals raw materials, etc. are obtained from trees. The economic value of these materials may be estimated. On the other hand there are too many benefits whose economic values cannot be determined directly. For example, the comfort we get when we sit under tree at the time of heated sunshine. Birds and other wild animals, such as monkeys, girgits, snakes, etc. live on tree plants and take shelter on it. Plants reduce erosion of soil, increase the fertility of soil. Trees protect lives and wealths during storms and tornadoes. Above all, trees protect the balance of the natural environment. The importance of trees may be categorized into two groups. These are :

1. Economic importance.

2. Environmental importance.

1. Economic Importance of Plants and Trees

Timber wood, fuel wood, raw materials for industries, food and pharmaceutical materials are mainly obtained from forest trees. Besides, colouring materials, essential oils, flavour materials and similar other chemical products may directly be collected from the forest tree resources.

Timber wood

Timber wood has important contributions to the daily life of human being. Wood is utilized

in construction of houses, preparing furniture and making agricultural implements and related

accessories. Wood is also used in railway sleeper making. The demand of wood in

Bangladesh is increasing day by day with the increae of population. At present about 82

lacs cubic meters wood per year is harvested from the

Page 211: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

206 Agricultural Education

forests and rural areas of Bangladesh. Its market price is about 10 thousand crores of taka. On the other hand, about 10 lacs people of the country are directly dependent on forest for their livelihood. Thus wood is playing a very important role in the economic development of the country.

Fuel Wood

The majority of the people in the rural and urban areas of Bangladesh use fuel wood, plant leaves, dry agricultural wastes and cowdung as fuel for cooking purpose. Large quantities of fuel woods are also used in brick fields and curing of tobacco in the country. It is understood that the agricultural wastes and cowdung could be used in crop field if arrangements could be made of supplying sufficient quantities of fuel wood. As a result, the fertility of soil could be increased and crop production would be better. But due to excessive cut of forest, plants and trees are gradually reducing in the country. This is causing serious depletion of soil organic matter. So, if the forest resources can not be increased, the fertility of the country's soil will continue to be reduced and scarcity of cooking fuel will be more critical and intrusive.

The present demand for fuel wood in Bangladesh is about three crores cubic meters. Lacs of people are involved in the fuel wood collection and sales. Thus, the trees of forest and rural areas of Bangladesh play a great economic role through meeting the demand of fuel wood.

Raw Materials for Industries

The raw materials required for paper, rayon, matches, tea chess, hard board come from the forest tree plants. The important raw materials for the two largest paper mills of the country are wood and bamboo collected from the forest areas. About 42 thousand tons of bamboo and 50 thousand cubic meters of wood (pulp wood) is utilized by the Karnaphuli Paper Mill per year. About one and a half lac cubic meters Gaoa wood is utilized in Khulna Newsprint Mill per year. Besides, the production of Khulna Hard Board Mill, Chandraghona Rayon Mill, Sylhet Paper and Pulp Mill, match industries greatly depend on the supply of necessary wood and bamboo. Moreover, innumerable small industries and cottage industries get their raw materials from the trees

Page 212: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Importance of Trees 207

of forest areas and rural small and cottage industries. Bamboo, cane and murta have much importance in the furniture and handicrafts industries. Presently these type of handicrafts are exported to foreign countries. In this way crores of foreign currencies are earned by Bangladesh and people of the country are getting more and more employment. So, trees and plants supplying raw materials for the industries playing a great role in the economic development of the country.

Food and Medicinal Plants

There are many medicinal and pharmaceutical plants growing in Bangladesh. Amlaki, Haritaki, Bohera, Arjun, Basak, Ashoke, Tulsi, etc. so many names of medicinal plants are know to us. These medicinal plants playing an important role from the ancient time in our country. The medicinal plants are used as raw materials in the ayurbedic pharmaceutical industries of the country. Thousands of people are getting employment in these Ayurbedic Pharmaceutical Industries. Innumerable people of the country are getting benefit by using ayurbedic and other rural medicines. We are getting many other fruits, vegetables, juices, etc. which have enough food value and importance. So many wild animals and birds are living by eating the fruits and vegetables growing in forest environments.

Other Economic Aspects of Tree Plants

Besides timber wood, fuel wood, raw materials for industries and medicinal materials, tree plants give us many other daily essential materials. Tree foliage are used as food for livestock. We get fibres for making cloths from plants, for example cotton fibre, rayon fibre are produced from bamboo. Wood charcoal is also produced from plants. These coals are utilized in industries and in scientific works. About 150 tons of honey is collected every year from Sundarban alone. Many people are employed and dependent for livelihood on collection and business of honey and wax in the Sundarban area.

Page 213: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

208 Agricultural Education

Fig: 99 What we get from forest plants

2. Environmental Importance : The context of forest plantation comes first when we discuss about environment. The role of forest plants are unlimited in controlling the balance of environment. Thus, it is essential to have forest areas that is forest plantations covering 25 per cent area of a country to maintain the environmental balance. The ways or process by which forest plantations contribute in maintaining environmental balance are briefly discussed below.

Page 214: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Importance of Trees 209

1. Plants absorb excess carbon di-oxide from the atmosphere and release oxygen to the air in exchange. In this way oxygen content of the atmospheric air is balanced. Atmosphere free of pollutants and its temperature is controlled.

2. Plantation increases the relative humidity of atmosphere releasing moisture through transpiration. In this way higher relative humidity of the atmosphere helps in increasing rainfall.

3. Plants prevent soil erosion, increase soil fertility and storage of under ground water and above all keep the climate and weather moderate.

4. Plants supply food and shelter to wild animals, birds, insects, etc.

Influence of Plantations in Preventing Natural Hazards.

1. Plantations effectively prevent climatic extremities. It keeps the climate and weather moderate and comfortable. These processes combinedly helps to reduce the probability of natural hazards, such as storms and tornadoes.

2. Plantations prevent soil erosion and land slide in the hilly areas. As a result plantations increase the navigability of rivers and canals and reduce flood hazards. The losses of lives and wealths are thus reduced to a great extent.

3. Plantations increase the underground water storage capacity through increasing absorption of water on the soil surface.

4. Plantations reduce the speed of coastal tornadoes and storms and plays a great role in saving lives and wealths of the people inhabiting in the coastal areas.

5. Big trees when planted in homestead protect the houses from the losses due to storms and tornadoes.

Influence of Plantations on Rainfall

Plantations increase the abosorption of water within the soil and thus increase the underground storage of water. Increased soil moisture thus achieved reduces the dryness of the atmosphere. The weather remains moderate. Simultaneously, plants through transpiration increase the water vapour or relative humidity of the atmospheric air. The water vapour helps in occurring rainfall in an area.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-27

Page 215: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

210 Agricultural Education

Plantations are the Habitat of Birds and Wild Life

Birds of diversified characteristics are the important natural resources of a country. Birds do many beneficial activities by eating harmful insect pests. Besides, the wild animals and birds also eat or destroy many insect pests and small animal bringing beneficial influence to human being. The plantations are the habitat for such wild animals and birds. In absence of these plantations the wild animals and birds will get extinct gradually and human being will be deprived to those beneficial activities.

Entertainment

Every human being requires to do different types of work for their livelihood. Man thus feels monotony after continuous hard working. At that time man requires rest and mental entertainment to remove the mental agony and monotony of work and physical tiredness. Human being mostly like the plantation surrounded open air places, songs of wild birds and diverse natural aesthetic beautiful environments for their mental entertainment. That's why picnics are arranged in natural and beautiful forest environments every year. The National Parks at Bhawal near Dhaka and Modhupur National Park are the most important centres for picnic and entertainment. Other centres for human entertainment attractions are the Himchari, Inani, Teknaf near Cox's Bazer, Jointia of Sylhet, Ramsagar of Dinajpur and Hiranpoint of Sundarban.

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. What is the main raw material of Karanaphuli paper mills?

a. Bamboo and wood b. Titas gas

c. Bio gas d. Jute.

2. Which one of the following is medicinal tree?

a. Bamboo b. Jute

c. Haritaki d. Cane

Page 216: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Importance of Trees 211

3. If large scale plantation is carried out then

i. Probability of natural hazards will not be there

ii. Coastal tornadoes will be reduced.

iii. Navigability of rivers is safe-guarded.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. I & iii

c. ii & iii d. I, ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 4 & 5.

The area of a country is 144000 Sq Km. Total forest area of the country is 23,000 Sq. Km.

4. What is the percentage of the forest area of the country?

a. about 16% b. about 20%

c. about 25% d. about 30%

5. Due to the presence of much forestry in the country.

i. there may be excessive rainfall.

ii. flood may occur

iii. environmental balance may be created.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. ii & iii

c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii

Page 217: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

212 Agricultural Education

Creative Questions (CQ)

Gopal lives on a hill by the side the river Surma. He has no other land than his homestead of 15 decimal area. Every year his fallow land too becomes affected by the hilly flood and rainfall. He afforested in that land by the advice of the forest officer and did never face same problem once again.

a. Importance of forest can be divided into how many main divisions.

b. Describe one merit of a tree which cannot be evaluated by money only.

c. Gopal was benefited through plantation of what type of trees-describe.

d. Analyze two prevailing (arisen) problems in your locality which can be solved by the plantation of trees.

Page 218: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 2 Cultivation of Bamboo, Cane And

Murta

Importance of Bamboo

Bamboo plays a great role in rural economy of Bangladesh. Bamboo is popularly known as the poor man's wood. Because most of the rural houses are made of bamboo. Bamboo is also the principal raw material for cottage industries. Besides, the large industries for example paper and rayon industries use bamboo as raw materials and bamboo greatly contributes in their production.

There are twenty three species of bamboo in Bangladesh. According to the places of growing, it is divided forest bamboo and rural bamboo. Forest bamboo mainly includes Muli, Mitinga, Dolu and forest Noli. The walls of these bamboos are thin. These bamboos are mostly lused in preparing thatches. The rural bamboo mainly includes Barak, Barua,Talla, Batua, Makla, Maral, etc. The walls of these bamboos are thick. These bamboos are principally used in strong functions like poles and frames of houses. Every bamboo species may have different specific local names.

Cultivation of Bamboo

Motha and Rizome System

Bamboo is normally cultivated through motha or rhizomes in rural Bangladesh. In this process a middle age bamboo is cut 100-150 cm above the soil. The bamboo base is uprooted along with the rhizome and planted to a selected new place. Care should be taken so that the cut rhizome contains 2 to 3 viable eye buds. Water should be irrigated to the planted motha if there is absence of rainfall after its plantation. The cut end of the bamboo should be covered by a polythylence or a similar material. The most suitable time of planting bamboo motha is the month of Baishakh. The bamboo mothas are usually planted in a slanting position. The spacing distance from one motha to another motha should be five to six meters.

Page 219: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

214 Agricultural Education

The bamboos grow to the large extent in height and girdth during the first 4-5 months. At the later stage mostly the walls of the bamboos become thicker and thicker. One single bamboo motha after planting gradually grows and multiplies and converted to a large bush in due course. A bamboo bush may produce 25-50 bamboos.

Layering System of Bamboo Cultivation

A bamboo of one to two years of age is layed on the soil in this system. Then the bamboo is placed under shallow depth soil. This is usually done in the month of Baishakh. New roots and shoots (motha like) are developed from some nodes of the laid down bamboo. The newly developed shoots look like a small bamboo seedling. Then the laid down bamboo is cut into pieces according to the position of the new roots and new shoots and planted to a selected place.

Cultivation of Bamboo from Seed

A bamboo plant flowers only once in its whole life cycle. Bamboo produces flowers in a period of 20-100 years according to species characters. After flowering the bamboo bush dies. At this stage bamboo seeds may be collected for producing bamboo seedlings and establishing bamboo gardens. Bamboo seedlings may be produced in poly bags puting seeds into it.

Cultural Practices of Bamboo Bushes

It is not only planting of bamboo, but appropriate cultural practices are to be done to have satisfactory production. The bamboo gardens should be irrigated during drought period. The surrounding places of the bamboo bush should be well spaded and the soil should be made loose. If possible, the base of the bamboo bush should be covered with straws and leaf mulches after mixing cowdung with the soil. If the bamboo bush is uncleaned then the bamboo plants may be attacked by different diseases. For this reason, the bamboo bushes should always be kept clean. If a certain bamboo is found to be infested by disease, then it should be uprooted and burned along with the motha or rhizome.

Time of Cutting Bamboo

The bamboos of one to two years of age are usually cut of harvested. In the government forest department system, bamboos are harvested following specific methods at an interval of three years.

Page 220: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Bamboo, Cane and Murta 215

Murta or Pati Pata

Importance of Murta or Pati Pata

The murta or pati pata is an important raw material of cottage industries and it is an economic plant in rural areas of Bangladesh. Specially pati pata is cultivated extensively in the districts of Sylhet, Mymensingh, Tangail, Dhaka, Comilla, Feni, Noakhali and Chittangong. About seven lacs of people are dependent for their livelihood on the pati pata industries.

The murta plant usually grows to the height of 2-4 meters. The skin of the murta stem is used in preparing 'Shital Pati' (fine cool mal). Once paties or different materials are prepared from the secondary skin or internal stronger materials.

Cultivation Method of Murta or Pati Pata

Marshy or moist lands are required for cultivation of murta or pati pata. The slopes of ponds, sides of marshy basin (doba) and the places where water stagnantes during the rainy season are good for pati pata cultivation.

Usually rhizomes of murta are planted to its propagation. Murta rhizomes are to be collected and planted in the months of May and June, in the prepared lands. The production of murta becomes higher if it is cultivated planting it in the spacing of 60 meter line to line and 60 meter from rhizome to rhizome. The murta produced from rhizome or motha may be suitable for harvesting within two years of planting.

The branches of murta may also be used as a propagator of murta cultivation. But yield of murta is reduced when stem's branches are planted. Maturity period of stem murta may be delayed to three years. However, yield and maturity period of the subsequent crops in the same plot remain normal. It has been found very beneficial when the base of the murta plants are spaded loosen the soil and earthing up is done every year.

Murta is harvested usually in the months of Chaitra and Baishakh. Murta plants are cut or harvested with the help of sharp sickle or dao. Murta is cut 2 to 7 cm above the soil in such a way that the ends of the stems are not squeezed or disturbed. Murta is an economic crop. If scientifically cultivated, an amount of take twenty five thousand may be earned from a hectare of land of murta garden.

Page 221: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

216 Agricultural Education

Cane Importance of Cane

Cane is the most important raw material for cottage industries in rural Bangladesh. Presently, the quantity of cane in forest and rural areas of the country is seriously decreasing. The main reason for such reduction is that the rate of harvesting is higher than the rate of planting. Besides, the places where canes were previously growing are being converted to other uses after clearing.

Other than the rural areas sufficient canes are also growing in the Sylhet. Chittagong and Chittagong Hill Tracts forest areas. There are 5-6 types of canes found to grow in Bangladesh, for examples Golla beth, Gali bet Bhutum beth, Bara beth, Lata beth, etc. All these types of canes are used in making furniture and other household and handicraft materials.

Cultivation of Cane

Cane may be cultivated mainly in two ways. For example by motha or by seed. Cane is cultivated in the rural areas of Bangladesh by motha. so many suckers produce from the base of cane plants in the rainy season. These suckers after collecting from the mother plants may be planted in other places during rainy days, which develop to new plants.

Cane seeds may be collected from the cane fruits after ripening. The cane seeds should be sown just after collection from the fruit. The cane fruits ripe during the month of Baishakh. If delayed in planting, the germination of cane seeds reduces to a great extent. Before sowing seeds, its juicy flesh should be clearly removed. This results in more successful germination of the seeds. The seeds at first to be sown in the seed bed. When two leaves emerge from the sees, then it should be transferred to poly bags. Germination of cane seeds

may take 3-12 weeks for complete germination. The seedlings may be kept in poly bag for a period of about one year. The seedlings are planted usually in the rainy season of the next year.

Cultural Practices of Cane Cultivation

Primarily, the field of cane cultivation should be made free from weeds, Canes usually grow better in partial shady and moist soils. So, canes should not be planted in open high lands. Cane when planted in association with big tree, then the cane plant gradually elimbs over the tree and grows naturally. Shelters or climbing materials enhance the growth of canes.

Page 222: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Cultivation of Bamboo, Cane and Murta 217

Methods of Cutting or Harvesting Canes

Cane attains the maturity of harvesting in a period of 5-7 years after planting. However, every year a few of the canes may be harvested from a cane bush.

Use of Cane

Cane is utilized in different ways in Bangladesh from the ancient time. The main use is in preparing furniture and household materials. Presently, due to the decrease in production of canes, the use of canes in household materials becoming rare. However, the importance and dignity of cane furniture and other materials are greatly increasing. Large number of cane furniture are being made and used in the country.

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. The element of preparing Shital Pati is-

a. Muli b. Cane

c. Batua d. Murta

2. Cane cultivation is done by-

i. planting suckers

ii. direct plantation of stem

iii. sowing seeds.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. i & iii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-28

Page 223: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

218 Agricultural Education

Red the following paragraph and answer question Nos. 3 & 4.

In the month of Bhadra Rafiza cut some middle aged bamboo at 1 meter height from the ground. She planted these cut bamboo with motha and began to irrigate then. In spite of this the bamboo did not grow.

3. At what height from the ground, Rafiza was to cut the bamboos?

a. 1.5 m b. 2.5 m

c. 2 m d. 3 m.

4. Rafiza was to plant the motha of bamboo in the month of-

i. Baishakh and Jaistha

ii. Jaishta and Ashar

iii. Ashar and Shraban.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. ii

c. iii d. i, ii , & iii. Creative Question (CQ)

Trees grow better in open area with light and air. From this idea Babul Mia decided to cultivate Bamboo and cane in his 20 Katha of paddy land. In half of the land he planted bamboo in the month of Baishakh and in the other half he planted cane in the month of Ashar. After one year it was found that the growth of bamboo was better but the growth of cane was not that much in comparison.

a. Why bamboo is called the wood of the poor?

b. Describe the intention of Babul Mia to plant cane in the month of Ashar.

c. Explain the cause of poor growth of cane of Babul Mia.

d. Analyze how far it was a correct decision of Babul Mia to cultivate bamboo and cane in the paddy field.

Page 224: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section-3

Introduction of Medicinal Plants and its Uses

Introduction

The rural people of Bangladesh are familiar with the medicinal plants of the country from very long ago. The leaves, barks, fruits, roots and vines of the medicinal plants are used as medicines from many years ago. The parts of those plants, whose flowers, fruits, roots, barks, leaves, etc. are used as medicines or raw materials of pharmaceutical/ayurbedic industries are termed as medicinal plants.

About 80 per cent people of Bangladesh live in the villages. The modern health service facilities in villages are very limited. In this context, if the people know that certain plants or parts of the plants are beneficial for curing certain diseases, then they can take the advantage of using such rural medicines easily. With this view, introductory information and the uses of some medicinal plants are discussed is this section.

Neem

Neem is a very popular tree of all over Bangladesh. The number of branches of neem tree is fewer. The leaves are narrow. This plant is found to grow all over the country. Seeds of neem tree should be collected in the months of June and July. Seedlings of neem tree should be produced putting the seeds in the poly bags within a week of its harvest. These seedlings may be planted in a place in the months of May and June next year.

Branches of neem tree when used as a tooth brush keep the teeth strong and clean. The leaf extracts of neem tree may be used as an insecticide for controlling insect pests of crops. There is a rural belief that branches and leaves of neem tree if hanged in a house, then no disease can enter into that house. According to this belief rural people plant neem nearby dwelling houses. The leaf extracts of neem tree when eaten, it gives good result in controlling worms. Besides, neem extracts are also found to be beneficial in the remedy of malaria, skin diseases and liver disorders.

Page 225: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

220 Agricultural Education

The use of neem extracts as organic insecticide have sensitized people of the world. This organic insecticide effectively destroys the harmful insect pests. Neem wood is also very hard. This wood is used in preparing boats, house construction and making furniture.

Neem is a big sized deciduous tree having large number of branches and foliage. The tree may grow to a height of up to 35 meters. The stem or log is round. The colour of the bark is gray-ash with thread like cracks on the surface. The flowers of the neem is oval shaped. The wood is very hard but houses. The extracts of the neem tree when eaten, it gives good result in controlling worms. Besides, neem extracts are also found to be beneficial in the remedy of malaria, skin diseases and liver disorders. The use of the neem extracts as organic insecticide have sensitized people of the world. Neem wood is also very hard. This wood is used in preparing boats, house construction and making furniture.

Arjun

Arjun is a deciduous plant. The height of the tree may be 20-25 meters. The bark is juicy and its surface is smooth. The colour of the timber is brown. Wood is very hard. The wood is widely used for making cart wheel, boat with equipments, etc. The value of the bark is also significant. The extract of the bark is used for the remedy of dysentery.

Arjun plant grows well in moist soils. This tree is widely found to grow all over Bangladesh. The plant may successfully be grown in road sides, embankments bank of pond, etc. in the rural areas of Bangladesh.

The seeds of arjun plant mature in the months of February to April. The ripened seeds may be preserved for about one year after collection and proper drying. The seeds may directly be sown in poly bag allowing them in water for two days. The seedling of about one year of age grown in poly bag is good for planting.

Ashok

Ashok is a medium sized evergreen tree. The number of branches are numerous in this plant. The leaves are long and the colour is deep green. The flowers of the Ashok are very beautiful. The colour of new leaves is bronze and are very soft. The orange-red flowers bloom in infloresence in the months of February and March. The fruits look like a country bean. The matured seeds are to be collected from ripened fruits

Page 226: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Introduction of Medicinal Plants and its Uses 221

look like a country bean. The matured seeds are to be collected from ripened fruits in the months of March of June. The seeds should be sown in poly bag just after collection. Ashok seeds can not be stored for a longer period. The seeds usually germinate within 7-15 days of sowing. A seedling of Ashok plant may attain a height of one metre in the first one year period.

Ashok tree is planted in the garden to increase its aesthetic or landscape beauty. The bark of ashok tree may be used as medicine in powder form. Dry flowers are used as medicine to cure dysentery. Seeds are also used for the remedy of urinary diseases. This wood is mainly used in making light furniture as well as fuel. Haritaki Haritaki is a medium sized deciduous tree, full of branches and foliage. The stem of the haritaki plant is round. The colour of the flower may be white or yellow. The colour of the wood is deep purple. The wood is medium strong. Haritaki wood is mainly used in preparing furniture and agricultural implements. Haritaki tree is found to grow naturally in Chittagong. Cox's Bazar, Sylhet and Bhawal and Modhupur forests.

The seeds of haritaki should be collected in the months of December to February. After proper drying of the seeds these may be stored for about one year. The seeds may be sown just after collection or in the months of May and June in poly bag. Seeds may also be sown directly in seed bed. But it is better to plant the seedling grown in poly bag. Haritaki is one of the importanct trees in the group which is consist of three medicinal plants know as 'Trifala' in our country. The other trees are namely 'Bohera and Amlaki'. The pharmaceutical

value of haritaki is many and diverse. Dried and powdered haritaki fruits are eaten soaking with water. Haritaki medicine shows rapid and excellent results in curing cough and asthma. Besides, haritaki medicinal derivatives are also used in the remedy of constipation and piles.

Bohera

Bohera is a big sized deciduous tree having large number of branches and foliage. The tree may grow to a height of up to 35 meters. The stem is round. The colour of the borak is gray-ash with thread like cracks on the surface. The flowers of bohera is oval in shape. The wood is very hard but can not persist a longer period. However,

Page 227: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

222 Agricultural Education

bohera wood do not get rotten when it is in touch of water. Bohera tree is found in most areas of the country. It is found to grow naturally in Chittagong, Chittagong Hill Tracts, Cox's Bazar, Sylhet and Bhawal and Modhupur forest areas.

The seeds of bohera should be collected in the months of November and December. The seeds may be stored for about a year through proper drying just after collection. Seedlings may be produced sowing seeds in poly bags in the months of January to March. The seeds should be moistened as follows before sowing.

⎯ Soaking seeds with water for two days.

⎯ Drying the seeds for one day.

⎯ Again soaking the seeds with water before sowing for some time.

The seeds are germinated within a period of 10-20 days after sowing. It is better to plant seedlings of two years age grown in poly bag. However, seeds may also be sown directly in the seed bed or stamps may also be prepared and planted. Bohera is a popular and useful plant of the 'Trifala' group of medicinal planted. Bohera is a plant of high pharmaceutical value. Use of bohera juice derivatives shows excellent results when it is used for the remedy of asthma, constipation, piles and liver diseases.

Amlaki

Amlaki is a small to medium sized plant. The leaves are compound and small. The flowers are small and pinkish green in colour. The colour of the fruit

varies from light green to yellow. The fruits are round in shape. There are six number of seeds normally found in each fruit. Amlaki is found to grow in all the forest and rural areas.

The seeds of amlaki should be collected in the months of November to January. The fruits may be collected both from the tree or from the bottom of the tree. The fruits after collection when kept in water for 7-8 days, the flesh of the fruit get rotten. Then the seeds are separated squeezing the fruits by hand. Seeds are sown in poly bags in the months of March and April for producing seedlings. Seeds are germinated within a period of 10-20 days after sowing. It is better to plant amlaki seedling when is two years.

Amalaki is one of the important medicinal trees of 'Trifala'. Amlaki contains sufficient quantities of vitamin C. The leaves and fruits contain tamin. The leaf extract may be used for colouring silk clothes making it brown. The fruits of amlaki are used in preparing writing ink, shampoo and hair dyes.

Page 228: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Introduction of Medicinal Plants and its Uses 223

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. Which trees are called Trifala?

a. Arjun, Amlaki, Ashok b. Ashok, Bahera, Mahua

c. Amlaki, Haritaki, Bahera d. Haritaki, Ashok, Arjun.

2. The effective medicine to cure asthma is-

i. Powder of Haritaki fruit

ii. Juicy part of Amlaki fruit

iii. Juice of Bahera fruit

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. ii & iii

c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question Nos. 3, 4 & 5.

Abu Sayeed planted nim, arjun, ashok, haritaki, bahera, amlaki etc by the side of his homestead. His intention was to help the villagers to use those without price during their illness. One day he saw some one having infection in his month and bleeding from the teeth. He brought him home and gave him some fruits plucking from a tree. Within a short time he was cured.

3. Why did Abu Sayeed plant medicinal trees by the side of his homestead?

a. For eating fruits

b. For collection of raw materials for industries

c. For collecting wood

d. For social service.

4. Which medicinal plant was used by Sayed to cure the disease of his known person?

a. Amloki b. Haritaki

c. Bahera d. Arjun.

Page 229: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

224 Agricultural Education

5. Arjun tree generally is

i. middle sized ever green tree

ii. leaf shedding tree

iii. known as medicinal plant.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. ii & iii

c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii.

Creative Question (CQ)

1. While on leave suman went to his grand pa’s house and suffered from constipation. His grand pa gave him powder of haritaki soaked with water and after eating that his constipation was over. His grand pa informed him that there were many medicinal plants in the village. Different parts like leaves, barks, flowers & fruits of the trees such as amlaki, horitaki, bohera, neem, arjun and ashok are used to cure various diseases, control different insects and work as a source of vitamin as well.

a. What is a medicinal plant?

b. Which parts of neem trees are used to control worms and keep the teeth strong?

c. Except the medicinal plant used by suman’s grandpa mention the name and describe the identity of another medicinal plant which can cure that disease.

d. Explain how the medicinal plant can play role in the treatment of the village people who are deprived of the facilities of modern treatment.

Page 230: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 4

Plantations on the sides of Roads and Embankments

Importance

About 25 per cent of total area of a country should consist maintain of forest land to keep balance in the environment. But this is absent in Bangladesh. The population is much higher than the area of the country. the per capita land available in Bangladesh is only 0.12 hectare. There is no other country in the world which has such a low per capita area of land.

Bangladesh is an agricultural country. The forest materials are also required for livelihood along with agricultural products. In addition, forest plantations are essential for maintaining the balance of environment. But the forest area in Bangladesh is lower as compared to actual requirement. It is not possible to convert crop lands to forest lands due to public demand of food self sufficiency of the country. In order to increase the forest resources in the context, planations are required to be encouraged in the fallow lands, sides of the roads and high ways and embankments, banks of rivers, canals. Homestead should be made full of trees, along with banks of ponds. Then the demands of timber wood will be met to a great extent. This will help in maintaining the balance of the natural environment reducing soil erosion.

Plantations may be done on the sides of roads and highways and embankments in a single row, in some places double rows or three rows. It has been estimated that if plantations are done in all the available roads and high ways, embankments, railways, banks of rivers and canals, then the plantation area will be equal to about 1.6 lacs hectare of forest lands.

Planting Trees

When there is scope of planting one row only on the sides of roads and highways and embankments, then arhar seeds may be sown. The arhar line should be planted 30 cm apart from the road or embankment in continuous (in closer spacing) line in the months of April and May. The land of arhar planting soil should be hold lightly and all the weeds should be uprooted and cleared. Then the arhar seeds are to be sown and covered with crushed soil.

Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-29

Page 231: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

226 Agricultural Education

The seedlings of trees should be planted 30 cm apart from the arhar line on the slope of the roads and embankments. The seedlings should be planted at a distance of two meters paralled to the arhar line. For planting seedlings pits should be prepared 30 days before the planting. The size of the pits should be 30 cm in length, 30 cm in width and 30 cm in depth. While making the pits, the upper soil and lower soil of the pits should be kept separately. The following fertilizers should be mixed with upper pit soil at least seven days before planting the seedlings. The fertilizers are :

Dry cowdung - 1 kg

Chemical fertilizer - 2 : 2 : 1 of urea, TSP and MP

Where : - urea 50 gm

TSP - 50 gm

MP - 25 gm

The upper pit soil mixed with the fertilizers should be given first in the pit. Then the lower pit soil should be given on the upper protion of the pit. The seedlings should be planted when monsoon rain starts. A dhaincha line may be sown 30 cm away from the seedling line, but in parallel positon. The soil of the land for dhaincha sowing should be hoed lightly. If sufficient place is available, plantations may be made in two or more rows on the sides of roads and embankments. In those cases the second line of tree seedlings should be planted 1.5 - 2.5 meters away from the first line but in parallel position. If more space is available then the third row may be given in the same way maintaining same distance. Forest species which can tolerate water logging should be planted the roads or embankments where there is possibility of submergence in the rainy season. The plants that can tolerate water logging mainly include sissu, mehgani, rain tree, babla, hijal pitali and kadam.

Cultural Practices for Road and Embankment Plantations

If there is any possibility of seedlings falling down, then the seedlings should be supported with a strong pole or stick placed along the stem. The base of the seedlings should be cleared after one to one and a half months of the planting during the rainy season. After one and a half month of planting 25 grams of urea may be applied to each seedling and mixed with the soil, 15 cm away from the base of the seedling. Mulching when applied at the base of the seedlings at the end of rainy season and at the begining of winter season helps to preserve soil moisture and keeps the seedlings vital and succulent. The planting design of seedlings at the side of the roads and embankments is given here.

Page 232: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Plantations on the sides of Roads and Embankments 227

Page 233: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

228 Agricultural Education

Practical

Title of the Experiment : Observation of the Planting Designs on the sides of the Roads and Embankments

Materials

1. Note book

2. Pencil, pen

3. Measuring tape

4. Scale

Work Process

1. Observe the planting design on the sides of roads and embankments near the school along with the class teacher.

2. After observing the planting design write down the report following the outline given below.

a. Name of the plants grown in the first line.

b. Distance from plant to plant.

c. Height of the plant (approximate), if any flower and fruit are there.

d. Name of the plant grown in the second line.

e. Distance of the second line from the first line.

f. Distance from plant to plant in meters in the second line.

g. Height of the plant (approximate) in second line, if flowers and fruits are present or absent in the second line.

h. Other descriptions.

3. Write down all the description of the wok in the practical note book and submit it to the class teacher.

Page 234: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Plantations on the sides of Roads and Embankments 229

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. What type of tree species should be planted on the sides of roads and highways and embankments when there is a possibility of flooding of the site during the rainy season?

a. Chapalish b. Sissu

c. Shegun d. Neem.

2. At least how many days earlier the pit should be prepared for planting seedlings?

a. 20 days b. 25 days

c. 30 days d. 35 days

3. Mulching to be applied at the base of the seedlings-

i. at the beginning of rainy season

ii. at the end of the rainy season.

iii. at the beginning of the winter.

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i & ii b. ii & iii

c. i & iii d. i, ii & iii

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 3 & 4.

Being inspired in forestry Mr. Farid planted some mango and guava trees on both sides of the road at the beginning of rainy season. He used to nurse the trees regularly. Suddenly trees were flood-affected and inundated under water and most of the trees died.

4. In this case Mr. Farid should have planted which of the following trees?

a. Sissu, Shegun and Shall b. Mehgani, Sissu, Babla

c. Hizal, Jackfruit, Barai d. Mehgani, Karai, Amra.

Page 235: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

230 Agricultural Education

5. The cause of dying of trees is that-

i. the trees were not planted in time

ii. appropriate trees were not planted.

iii. proper place was not selected

Which one of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii Creative Question (CQ) 1. Jahangir of Khulna has been serving in Dhaka for a long time. During Eid holidays while going home he saw that most of the trees planted by the side of the road were destroyed by cyclone. He thought how trees could be planted by the side of the road as well as in his locality. He learnt about the forestry by the side of the road and measured the inclination of the road with an intention to design a drawing. He measured the length of the inclined area as 3 meters. Later on he motivated the local people and grew a social forestry by the side of that road.

a. How much forest area is needed to maintain the environmental balance?

b. Explain one importance of forestry.

c. Describe with a neat sketch the method and drawing followed by Jahangir on plantation of trees by the side of the road of his locality.

d. Evaluate the importance of motivating the village people for their economic development in such forestry.

Page 236: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Section 5 Agro Forestry

Introduction

The meaning of agro forestry is the cultivation of agricultural crops in association with the growing of multipurpose trees in the same land. In agro forestry method, one piece of land is cultivated in such a system that the maximum productive use of the land is achieved. Simultaneous production of crop, tree, food and livestock food is ensured by this system of farming. Vegetable farming may be done along with the homestead forestry in Bangladesh. Production of agricultural crops are being done under big and small trees, within the same garden from the ancient time. Simultaneous production of crops, vegetables and fruits are not the new things. People from the time immemorial are familiar with such an integrated system of farming. History of the cultivation of agricultural crops in the forest land while establishing forests is also known from the ancient time. Cultivation of agricultural crops in association with trees in forest areas is known as Tangya System. In this system, all the practices of producing agricultural crops and forests are done simultaneously in the same land and at the same time. However, all the works are required to be done through plan and programmes. thus agro forestry may be a method of farming in which maximum production of agricultural crops, animal food, fruits and vegetables are ensured, considering the sustained level of soil fertility and diversified production is achieved through an well planned utilization of the same land.

The population of Bangladesh is higher in comparison to the area of cultivable land. The demand for agricultural products and forest products are increasing due to the higher rate of population increase. It is becoming impossible to meet up the demand of increasing population from the limited area of land. In this circumstances, we shall have to follow those practices which can ensure most effective use of the available limited land. Agro forestry can increase the productivity of the land maintaining the soil fertility. So agro forestry is an unique farming system and is of very much importance in Bangladesh.

Page 237: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

232 Agricultural Education

The Characteristics of Trees Suitable for Use in Agro Forestry A plant having the following characteristics may suitably be selected as a tree for use in agro forestry :

1. Rapidly growing trees having the capacity of producing large quantities of timber wood, fuel wood, and livestock food. For example, ipil ipil, sissu, koroi, eucalyptus, etc.

2. Plants which can fix atmospheric nitrogen in their root nodules. For example, ipil ipil, koroi, sissu, bable, etc.

3. Plants with less of foliage spread (width). The stem and branch leaves are smaller in size and number. For example, plamyra palm, date palm, etc.

4. Plants that produce roots having less competitiveness with the nutrients of main field crops. For example plamyra palm and other deep rooted trees.

5. Plants having excessive dropping of leaves and which (leaves) are rapidly decomposed in soil. For example, mander and other legume trees.

6. Plants which rapidly grow when pruned producing sufficient secondary foliage. For example ipil ipil, koroi, hijal, mander and sissu.

System of Agro Forestry

As we have very limited agricultural land per capita, so we should learn the systems or growing more crops in a small area of land. Agro forestry is such an important system. Agro forestry can ensure a permanent high productivity of available lands. There are many systems or models of agro forestry. Any one of those systems may be practiced in accordance with the nature of land and local demand. A number of agro forestry systems are described here briefly.

1. Agro-sylviculture Model

The term agro-sylviculture means the integrated culture of agricultural crops and trees. In this agro forestry system agricultural crops and trees may be grown simultaneously in an integrated system in the same piece of land. The system results in increased total production and protection of soil fertility.

Page 238: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Agro Forestry 233

A pictorial model of agro-sylvicultural system has been illustrated below (next page)

Fig: 102 Agro-sylviculture method of cultivation

Fig : 103 Sylvi pastoral method of cultivation

2. Sylvi-pastoral Model

In the Sylvi-pastoral System livestock rood (grass and grain) are cultivated along with tree culture. Thus, the total productivity of the land increases. The fertility level of the soil increases too. Agricultural Education, For class-VIII, Forma-30

Page 239: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

234 Agricultural Education 3. Sylvi-horticultural Model In the sylvi-horticultural system fruit trees, fruits and vegetables are produced in association with forest tree species. Through the scientific utilization of this integrated method, the maximum productivity of the land and soil is achieved.

Fig: 104 Sylvi-horticultural method of cultivation

Exercise

Multiple Choice Question (MCQ)

1. In agro-forestry the soil

a. loses the fertility b. is partially utilized

c. erosion is more. d. is used maximum.

2. The remarkable role of ipil-ipil tree is-

i. to supply wood. ii. to supply nitrogen.

iii. to supply organic substance

Which of the following is correct?

a. i b. i & ii

c. ii & iii d. i, ii & iii

Page 240: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural

Agro Forestry 235

Read the following paragraph and answer question nos. 3 & 4.

Some years ago Amit planted some big trees in his house of area 1 bigha. The trees has become large enough. He came to learn from his agriculturist friend that if horticultural crops were cultivated under these large trees good harvest could be achieved. He cultivated wheat under the big trees but did not get an expected result.

3. What type species of trees did Amit plant?

a. Akashmoni, Rain tree b. Sissu and Mehgani

c. Shegun and Shal d. Mango and Jack fruit.

4. What is called such a culture adopted by Amit?

a. Agriculture b. Agro sylvi culture

c. Sylvi pashtural d. Sylvi horticulture

Creative Question (CQ) 1. Rahim Baksh used to pass his days in poverty even in one decade ago. He has large number of unemployed and illiterate children. In addition his lands were acidulated and elevated. Under these circumstances, he went for agro-forestry in the land. A part of his forestry is shown below:

Fig 105 : Agro Forestry

a. What is meant by Agro-Forestry? b. Describe one characteristic of one tree suitable for agro-forestry. c. Explain the model of Agro-forest of Rahim Baksh. d. Explain the suitability of selecting the land for agro-forestry

Page 241: Prescribed by the National Curriculum and Textbook Board ...practical classes. Agriculture Science has been made compulsory from class VI to class VIII from 1994. This book of Agricultural